Software manual
TruTops Mark®
Software manual
TruTops Mark® Original operator's manual
Edition: 02/2010
1434727
Ordering information
Please state title of document, desired language and date of edition. TRUMPF Laser Marking Systems AG Technische Dokumentation Ausserfeld CH-7214 Grüsch Fon: +41 (0) 81/30 76-5 88 Fax: +41 (0) 81/30 76-5 89 Internet: http://www.lasermarking.trumpf.com E-Mail:
[email protected]
This document was compiled by the Technical Editorial Department of TRUMPF Laser Marking Systems AG © TRUMPF Laser Marking Systems AG
Table of Contents Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Introduction to TruTops Mark® operation 1. 1.1 1.2 1.3
Laser marking ................................................................ 1-3 Why use a laser marker?................................................. 1-3 Principle ........................................................................... 1-7 Processes ...................................................................... 1-10
2.
The TruTops Mark® concept ....................................... 1-11
3. 3.1
Introduction to the manual ......................................... 1-14 Terminology ................................................................... 1-14
Options for user levels and software modules 1.
Basic cofigurations ex works....................................... 2-3
2.
Default setting for the customer/operator................... 2-4 Set user level .............................................................. 2-5 Enable option at customer ............................................. 2-12
2.1 3. 3.1
3.2 3.3 3.4
3.5
SW-EN-TTM-00-00 02/2010
Optional settings ......................................................... 2-13 Navigator........................................................................ 2-13 Group field Extra....................................................... 2-14 Group field Material .................................................. 2-14 Group field Process .................................................. 2-15 Group field Content .................................................. 2-16 Group field Matrix ..................................................... 2-17 Display Help (operating sequence) .......................... 2-20 Display laser power (LPM)............................................. 2-21 Calibrate laser power (LPC) .......................................... 2-23 Pilot laser ....................................................................... 2-25 Operating modes ...................................................... 2-26 Activating the pilot laser............................................ 2-27 Matrix generator............................................................. 2-28 Introduction ............................................................... 2-28
Table of Contents
0-5
3.6
Chapter 3
0-6
Binning...................................................................... 2-31 Operation .................................................................. 2-32 Imager............................................................................ 2-45 Import bitmap............................................................ 2-46 Assign laser parameters........................................... 2-48 Optimize grayscale chart .......................................... 2-49 Define marking direction........................................... 2-50 Other settings than standard .................................... 2-52
Marking interface 1. 1.1 1.2
Starting and exiting TruTops Mark® ............................ 3-3 Starting............................................................................. 3-3 Exiting .............................................................................. 3-3
2. 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4
Start screen .................................................................... 3-4 Running a marking program ............................................ 3-5 Loading a marking program............................................. 3-6 Viewing the marking program .......................................... 3-7 Starting the marking program .......................................... 3-7
3. 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4
Working with the marking interface........................... 3-11 Buttons and function keys.............................................. 3-11 Status area .................................................................... 3-14 Starting the marking program ........................................ 3-20 Menus ............................................................................ 3-23
4. 4.1 4.2
File menu ...................................................................... 3-24 > 1 Open ........................................................................ 3-24 > 2 Exit........................................................................... 3-24
5. 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4
Laser menu................................................................... 3-25 > 1 Pilot laser setup ....................................................... 3-25 > 2 Multiple marking ...................................................... 3-26 > 3 Scanner (Autocalibration) ........................................ 3-26 > 4 Reset ....................................................................... 3-27
6.
Module menu................................................................ 3-28
7. 7.1 7.2
Tools menu................................................................... 3-29 > 1 CAD Editor............................................................... 3-29 > 2 Diagnostics tool ....................................................... 3-29
Table of Contents
SW-EN-TTM-00-00 02/2010
Chapter 4
7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6 7.7 7.8 7.9 7.10
> 3 Supply unit simulator ............................................... 3-30 > 4 QuickFlow ................................................................ 3-30 > 5 Error display............................................................. 3-31 > 6 TLV Test Tool .......................................................... 3-32 > 7 MatrixGenerator....................................................... 3-33 > 8 GridGenerator.......................................................... 3-33 > 9 Check laser power................................................... 3-33 > 10 Calibrate laser power............................................. 3-33
8. 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6
Extras menu ................................................................. 3-34 > 1 Change user level.................................................... 3-35 > 2–6 Change status displays ....................................... 3-36 > 7 Configuration ........................................................... 3-36 > 8 Registry backup ....................................................... 3-46 > 9 Delete current VCT files .......................................... 3-46 > 10 Delete all VCT files ................................................ 3-47
9. 9.1 9.2
Workstation menu ....................................................... 3-48 > 1 Referencing ............................................................. 3-48 > 2 Configuration ........................................................... 3-48
10. 10.1 10.2
Help menu .................................................................... 3-50 > 1 TruTops Mark®......................................................... 3-50 > 2 Info........................................................................... 3-50
11. 11.1 11.2 11.3 11.4 11.5 11.6 11.7
Modules ........................................................................ 3-51 Control with external data communication..................... 3-51 Control with workstation................................................. 3-52 Control with digital interface........................................... 3-53 QuickFlow control .......................................................... 3-53 Control with serial interface ........................................... 3-53 Control with TCP/IP interface ........................................ 3-54 Control with COM interface............................................ 3-54
CAD 1. 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5
SW-EN-TTM-00-00 02/2010
CAD ................................................................................. 4-5 Introduction ...................................................................... 4-5 Marking program.............................................................. 4-6 Starting CAD.................................................................... 4-6 User interface of CAD...................................................... 4-7 User interface of CAD with Multihead............................ 4-13
Table of Contents
0-7
0-8
2. 2.1 2.2
Working with CAD ....................................................... 4-14 Drawing an object .......................................................... 4-14 Change objects.............................................................. 4-17
3. 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 3.10
File menu ...................................................................... 4-22 > New............................................................................. 4-22 > Open ........................................................................... 4-22 > Close........................................................................... 4-23 > Save............................................................................ 4-23 > Print ............................................................................ 4-23 > Print preview ............................................................... 4-24 > Printer setup ............................................................... 4-25 > Print section ................................................................ 4-25 > Send ........................................................................... 4-27 > Exit.............................................................................. 4-27
4. 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 4.10 4.11 4.12
Edit menu ..................................................................... 4-28 > Undo ........................................................................... 4-28 > Repeat ........................................................................ 4-29 > Cut .............................................................................. 4-29 > Copy ........................................................................... 4-29 > Paste........................................................................... 4-29 > Delete ......................................................................... 4-29 > Modify ......................................................................... 4-30 > Properties ................................................................... 4-42 > Import file .................................................................... 4-45 > Export DXF/DWG ....................................................... 4-48 > Remove double line.................................................... 4-49 > Create polyline............................................................ 4-49
5. 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 5.9
View menu .................................................................... 4-50 > Status bar ................................................................... 4-50 > Tool bars..................................................................... 4-51 > Entire page ................................................................. 4-54 > Entire drawing............................................................. 4-54 > Selection ..................................................................... 4-54 > Last view..................................................................... 4-54 > Named sections .......................................................... 4-55 > Refresh ....................................................................... 4-56 > Only thin lines ............................................................. 4-56
6. 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4
Draw menu ................................................................... 4-57 > Line ............................................................................. 4-60 > Rectangle.................................................................... 4-64 > Circle........................................................................... 4-66 > Arc of a circle .............................................................. 4-69
Table of Contents
SW-EN-TTM-00-00 02/2010
SW-EN-TTM-00-00 02/2010
6.5 6.6 6.7 6.8 6.9 6.10 6.11 6.12 6.13
> Polyline ....................................................................... 4-73 > Ellipse ......................................................................... 4-76 > Arc of an ellipse .......................................................... 4-77 > Bitmap......................................................................... 4-78 > Dimensioning .............................................................. 4-81 > Hatching...................................................................... 4-83 > Point............................................................................ 4-83 > Tools ........................................................................... 4-84 > Data object.................................................................. 4-88
7. 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6 7.7 7.8 7.9 7.10 7.11 7.12 7.13 7.14 7.15 7.16
Laser menu................................................................. 4-105 > Print project............................................................... 4-106 > Export project data as XML file................................. 4-108 > Laser parameters...................................................... 4-108 > Marking field ............................................................. 4-136 > Sort ........................................................................... 4-148 > Generate object matrix ............................................. 4-151 > Variables................................................................... 4-153 > Hatch styles .............................................................. 4-158 > Font Editor ................................................................ 4-159 > Sort segments........................................................... 4-160 > Project data............................................................... 4-161 > Pilot laser on/off ........................................................ 4-162 > Marking ..................................................................... 4-162 > Navigator .................................................................. 4-163 > Focus test ................................................................. 4-163 > Slow hatch as area ................................................... 4-164
8. 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5
Font Editor.................................................................. 4-165 File menu ..................................................................... 4-168 Edit menu..................................................................... 4-181 View menu ................................................................... 4-182 Font menu.................................................................... 4-187 Help.............................................................................. 4-201
9. 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6 9.7 9.8 9.9
Tools menu................................................................. 4-201 > Layers ....................................................................... 4-202 > Measurement type .................................................... 4-205 > Colors ....................................................................... 4-209 > Grid ........................................................................... 4-210 > Grid active................................................................. 4-212 > Orthogonal mode ...................................................... 4-212 > Jump mode ............................................................... 4-213 > Jump to points of intersection................................... 4-213 > Options ..................................................................... 4-214
Table of Contents
0-9
Chapter 5
0-10
10.
Window menu ............................................................ 4-230
11. 11.1 11.2
Menu ? (Help) ............................................................. 4-230 > Index ......................................................................... 4-230 > Copyright .................................................................. 4-230
Examples, exercises 1.
Introduction.................................................................... 5-3
2. 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6
Example – Compass...................................................... 5-4 Creating a graphic ........................................................... 5-5 Administrate and allocate laser parameters .................. 5-26 Optimize marking program ............................................ 5-31 Optimize graphic............................................................ 5-32 Optimize marking sequence .......................................... 5-32 Optimize laser parameters............................................. 5-34
3. 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4
Rating plate example................................................... 5-38 Inserting the TRUMPF logo and lettering ...................... 5-44 Define and position variables ........................................ 5-48 Sorting interactively ....................................................... 5-53 Set laser parameters ..................................................... 5-55
4. 4.1
Target example ............................................................ 5-63 Define hatching style ..................................................... 5-67
5. 5.1
CE mark example......................................................... 5-70 "Trim (cut)" tool .............................................................. 5-74
6. 6.1 6.2
Example bitmap ........................................................... 5-77 Importing bitmap ............................................................ 5-78 Setting laser parameter ................................................. 5-81
7. 7.1 7.2
Import external file formats ........................................ 5-82 Import PCR files............................................................. 5-82 Import CAD files............................................................. 5-83
8. 8.1 8.2 8.3
Determining laser parameters.................................... 5-84 Determining laser parameters for plastic....................... 5-84 Determining laser parameters for annealing metals...... 5-86 Determining laser parameters for engraving metals ..... 5-88
Table of Contents
SW-EN-TTM-00-00 02/2010
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
Chapter 8
SW-EN-TTM-00-00 02/2010
Sequential programs 1. 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9
Automatic marking ........................................................ 6-3 Start sequential program ................................................. 6-4 Loading a sequential program ......................................... 6-6 Change sequential program ............................................ 6-7 Create a new sequential program ................................... 6-8 Accept values .................................................................. 6-9 Save sequential program............................................... 6-10 Exit editor ....................................................................... 6-12 Context menu ................................................................ 6-13 Setup.............................................................................. 6-14
2. 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4
Commands in the editor menu................................... 6-17 General commands ....................................................... 6-18 > Axis commands .......................................................... 6-20 > Axis commands inching operation......................... 6-22 > Mark commands ......................................................... 6-23 > System commands ..................................................... 6-26
3.
Examples for sequential programs............................ 6-31
Installing TruTops Mark® 1. 1.1 1.2
Introduction.................................................................... 7-3 System requirements....................................................... 7-3 Contents of the data medium........................................... 7-3
2.
Installation...................................................................... 7-4
Index
Table of Contents
0-11
0-12
Table of Contents
SW-EN-TTM-00-00 02/2010
Chapter 1
Introduction to TruTops Mark® operation
SW-EN-TTM-01-00 02/2010
1. 1.1 1.2 1.3
Laser marking ................................................................ 1-3 Why use a laser marker?................................................. 1-3 Principle ........................................................................... 1-7 Processes ...................................................................... 1-10
2.
The TruTops Mark® concept ....................................... 1-11
3. 3.1
Introduction to the manual ......................................... 1-14 Terminology ................................................................... 1-14
Laser marking
1-1
1-2
Laser marking
SW-EN-TTM-01-00 02/2010
1.
Laser marking
1.1
Why use a laser marker?
Marking of industrial goods with a laser has gained in significance considerably in recent years. The reasons are: •
High degree of process flexibility
•
Simplified operation due to further development of the software
•
Inexpensive marking systems
Laser marking has a number of advantages in comparison to conventional methods such as stamping, punching, mechanical engraving, etching or pad printing which include:
SW-EN-TTM-01-00 02/2010
•
Non-contacting processing - no tool wear
•
Minimum effect on the material
•
Wide range of materials can be processed
•
No preparation or reworking necessary
•
High marking quality and reproducibility
•
Any marking geometry possible
•
High degree of flexibility
•
Application of very fine marking (to 0.03 mm) is possible
•
High marking speed
•
Simple integration into fully automatic manufacturing processes
Laser marking
1-3
Industrial goods are marked for different reasons. Various applications are, for example: •
Workpiece or specific device marking
•
Marking to ensure continuous traceability (product liability).
•
Marking to prevent imitation (corporate logos)
•
Color and design-related identification
•
Grains and marking lines for downstream manufacturing processes
Why mark?
Laser-marked rating plate
1-4
Laser marking
Fig. 1-1
SW-EN-TTM-01-00 02/2010
•
Marking for product specification
Laser-marked pressure cells
•
Marking for workpiece identification
Laser-marked data matrix code on the workpiece
Demands on industrial marking
SW-EN-TTM-01-00 02/2010
Fig. 1-2
Fig. 1-3
Industrially applied marks and labels must meet the following requirements: • Permanent marking •
Easily recognizable lettering
•
High degree of flexibility with regard to content and form
•
Minimum affect on material
•
Inexpensive
•
"Online integration" possible, e.g. direct transmission of data to the workpiece
Laser marking
1-5
Laser-marked circuit breaker
1-6
Laser marking
Fig. 1-4
SW-EN-TTM-01-00 02/2010
1.2
Principle
Laser light is distinguished by a characteristic wavelength for the respective laser type and a high power density. The laser beam is focused on the material for marking. The interaction with the surface results in a change in the material – for example discoloring or material removal. The exact effect on the material depends mainly on the wavelength of the laser and from the interaction time of the laser beam with the material (pulse duration). How does marking occur?
The interaction of the laser light with the material depends on the absorption behaviour of the processed material at the selected wavelength of the laser, the heat conductivity of the material and the set processing parameters (e.g.: laser power, laser speed and the pulse repetition frequency). There are five different marking methods:
Engraving
•
Engraving
•
Annealing
•
Material removal
•
Change in color and bleaching
•
Foaming
Metal, ceramics and several plastics can be engraved with the laser. The power density of the laser beam is so high that the material evaporates partly during processing. An itself colorless indentation results in the material – the engraving. Oxides sometimes form in the engraving, the color of which make the mark even clearer.
Marking by engraving
SW-EN-TTM-01-00 02/2010
Laser marking
Fig. 1-5
1-7
Annealing
Certain types of steel and titan can be marked by annealing. The material is locally heated to just below its melting point. As a result very thin oxide layers form on the surface and with these the annealing colors. Annealed colors are stable at temperatures of up to approximately 200°C.
Marking by annealing
Material removal
Coated materials can be marked by removing the top layer with the laser. Example: Anodized aluminum, painted materials or laser marking film.
Marking by material removal
Change in color and bleaching
Fig. 1-7
This process is mainly used for plastics. Due to the energy of the laser beam, the structure of individual molecules or additives, for example color pigments, is either directly changed or destroyed. The material and laser wavelength must be optimally coordinated to this purpose. A change in color or bleaching of the material is then visible on the treated areas. The surface of the material remains almost undamaged.
Marking by change in color and bleaching
1-8
Fig. 1-6
Laser marking
Fig. 1-8
SW-EN-TTM-01-00 02/2010
Foaming
Foaming is only possible with certain plastics. The laser beam makes the plastic melt locally. Small gas bubbles then form which are encapsulated when the material cools. In contrast to engraving a "raised" inscription is then formed. The light falling on the treated areas is reflected diffusely – as a result they appear to be lighter.
Marking by foaming
SW-EN-TTM-01-00 02/2010
Laser marking
Fig. 1-9
1-9
1.3
Processes
TRUMPF Laser Marking Systems work according to the vector marking process – the image is made up of a number of lines ("vectors").
2
3
4 1 4
5
6
1 Marking program
4 Deflection mirror
2 Control unit
5 Lens
3 Laser head
6 Marking field
Configuration of a laser marking system
Laser and beam direction
Fig. 1-10
The laser head produces the laser beam which is required for the marking process. The beam is directed with the deflection mirrors and lenses to where the mark is to be made – on the surface of the workpiece. The control unit regulates and monitors all processes and is an interface between the operator and the marking system. The TruTops Mark® control program permits an efficient man-machine dialog. The main features of TruTops Mark® are:
1-10
•
Functions for creating texts
•
CAD interfaces for reading in existing graphic files – e.g. logos or special characters
•
Integration of online measuring data
•
Functions for the generation of barcodes, variables and serial numbers
•
Option for the integration of manufacturing processes, communication with manufacturing computers
Laser marking
SW-EN-TTM-01-00 02/2010
The TruTops Mark® concept
2.
11
22 10
12
20 21
13 14
TruTops Mark
10 Control software 11 Interfaces 12 Marking on the fly (MOF) 13 QuickFlow for sequential programming 14 Diagnostics tool 20 Graphic data input (CAD Editor) 21 Laser parameter administration 22 Navigator Fig. 1-11
The control software TruTops Mark has an intuitive user interface. Via this user interface it is possible to control: • • • • • • •
Interfaces
Marking on the fly (MOF)
SW-EN-TTM-01-00 02/2010
Interfaces Simple Marking on the fly QuickFlow for sequential programming Diagnostics tool CAD Editor Laser parameter administration Navigator
TruTops Mark is based on Windows and is provided in several languages. Variable production data can be integrated in a predefined marking program via the integrated interface. TruTops Mark offers a variety of possibilities for the control-side integration of the laser marking system in existing plants. A "COM Inprocess Server" provides the interface for software developed and supplied by the customer. Within continuous production processes, workpieces can be marked without stopping the assembly line. MOF overlays the movement of the object to be marked with the movement of the laser beam to make sure the marking is not distorted. The workpiece transport is continually measured via encoder signals to guarantee a constant marking quality during start-up and braking procedures.
The TruTops Mark® concept
1-11
Sequential programming
The sequential program can control all machine functions in connection with a TruMark Station. The sequential programs can be written or changed via the editing mode.
QuickFlow
The visual software program "QuickFlow" has been developed to simplify the generation of sequential programs. With a simple "Pick and Drop" it is possible to generate programs to control the complete marking cycle from start to finish.
Service via the diagnostics tool
You would like to reduce your downtimes to a minimum? In that case you need the help of our service team. Via telepresence and the public communication network it is possible to carry out a telediagnosis. Call up the diagnostics tool. The diagnostics tool visualizes and analyzes the recorded measurement readings by means of its sensors. It indicates a complete list of monitoring and error messages, along with the current status information and the operating values of the laser marking system during the process.
User interfaces
When switching the laser marking system on, TruTops Mark® is automatically started via the control computer. TruTops Mark® is a software specifically developed for marking processes. Depending on the presetting, the user interface for laser marking systems is started without a module preselection (left) or a TruMark Station (right).
Fig. 1-12
User interfaces
TruTops Mark supports the operating personnel in the user levels "Customer" or "Operator", serving the purpose of generating marking and sequential programs. Unlike the marking programs, sequential programs can be constructed in a complex manner with control sequences to control the procedures of whole processes.
1-12
The TruTops Mark® concept
SW-EN-TTM-01-00 02/2010
To be able to start working with the CAD, click on the "CAD" button or the function key.
The CAD Editor The components of the CAD Editor
serves to generate or change marking programs. are designed for the operation. The marking preview shows the section which is going to be marked in a further step on a workpiece.
1 2
3
4
5
1
Menu bar
2
Icon bars
3
Ruler bars
4
Drawing field / marking area
5
Status line
Components of the CAD Editor
Fig. 1-13
The CAD Editor offers all the usual functions for the drawing and arranging of graphic objects a complete CAD program contains. With the CAD Editor you can create drawings which are converted with the marking module into marking programs and then executed by the laser marking system. Both, simple geometry such as squares, circles and texts as well as complex geometry with several drawing elements can be created. It is also possible to generate special marks such as serial numbers, barcodes etc.
SW-EN-TTM-01-00 02/2010
The TruTops Mark® concept
1-13
With corresponding converters, CAD drawings or pixel files can be imported which can be varied as required. The laser parameters are also defined in the CAD Editor. Laser parameter administration
All existing laser parameters are combined in a separate dialog, thematically devided and clearly represented. Since the laser parameters are organized in a database, the parameters optimized for special materials can be used again and again.
Navigator option
The navigator option is provided to enable you as a customer to promptly find, adjust, and optimize the appropriate laser parameters for your marking task. More detailed information is given in Chapter 2.
3.
Introduction to the manual
This manual is provided to assist you in becoming familiar with TruTops Mark® programming and its options quickly and simply. The manual serves as supplementary documentation to software training and also as a reference. The manual is also provided for the operating personnel working with the OEM laser marking systems/laser units. It is advantageous for using the manual if certain terms are explained in advance.
3.1
1-14
Terminology
Select
Functions from the main menu bar, screen menus and buttons are selected.
Click
Position the mouse pointer and click the left-hand mouse button once.
Marking program
Drawings and texts which are to be marked on the workpiece are created with the CAD Editor and saved in a marking program. The program contains additional graphic data for controlling the scanner head of the laser marking system as well as the necessary laser parameters.
Sequential program
The sequential program runs on the control computer of the laser marking system, controls the entire sequence of a marking operation and also the functions of the machine and exchanges data with other Windows applications and external systems or control units.
Marking field
The marking field is the area in which marking can be performed by the laser. The size of the marking field depends on the machine and is adjusted in the marking interface in accordance with the selected optics.
Introduction to the manual
SW-EN-TTM-01-00 02/2010
Chapter 2
Options for user levels and software modules 1.
Basic cofigurations ex works....................................... 2-3
2.
Default setting for the customer/operator................... 2-4 Set user level .............................................................. 2-5 Enable option at customer ............................................. 2-12
2.1 3. 3.1
3.2 3.3 3.4
SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010
Optional settings ......................................................... 2-13 Navigator........................................................................ 2-13 Group field Extra....................................................... 2-14 Group field Material .................................................. 2-14 Group field Process .................................................. 2-15 Group field Content .................................................. 2-16 Group field Matrix ..................................................... 2-17 Display Help (operating sequence) .......................... 2-20 Display laser power (LPM)............................................. 2-21 Calibrate laser power (LPC) .......................................... 2-23 Pilot laser ....................................................................... 2-25 Operating modes ...................................................... 2-26 Activating the pilot laser............................................ 2-27
Basic cofigurations ex works
2-1
3.5
3.6
2-2
Basic cofigurations ex works
Matrix generator............................................................. 2-28 Introduction ............................................................... 2-28 Binning...................................................................... 2-31 Operation .................................................................. 2-32 Imager............................................................................ 2-45 Import bitmap............................................................ 2-46 Assign laser parameters........................................... 2-48 Optimize grayscale chart .......................................... 2-49 Define marking direction........................................... 2-50 Other settings than standard .................................... 2-52
SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010
1.
Basic cofigurations ex works
Laser marking systems Several basic configurations are available depending on the laser marking system. OEM Series TruMark Series 3000
Remark Compact solid-state laser or Air-cooled solid laser
TruMark Series 5000
Quick compact fiber laser
TruMark Series 6000
Water-cooled high-performance solidstate laser
Laser units Code
Name
TMS 1000
TruMark Station 1000
TMS 5000
TruMark Station 5000
TMS 5000 R
TruMark Station 5000 Rotary table
TMS 7000
TruMark Station 7000
Simulation mode With the office PC it is possible to operate TruTops Mark in the simulation mode. So you can intuitively become aquainted with the settings of the laser marking systems and laser units. The settings for the software and hardware options are unavailable.
SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010
Basic cofigurations ex works
2-3
2.
Default setting for the customer/operator
Hardware and software options can be preset specifically, depending on whether the laser marking system is operated on its own or in combination with a laser unit. 2 user levels are provided: • Customer • Operator The user level "Customer" is preconfigured ex works as the default setting, that is the user management is not activated in the delivery status. The customer has access to all functions of the marking surface described in this documentation. This offers you, as "Customer", the possibility to set up the "Operator" user level according to your own ideas. The "Customer" can enable or disable various functions by activating the user management. If you click the checkbox "Activate" in the user management, the user management is switched on. To activate the rights of the operator, click the checkboxes in the input area "Settings for the operator" under the following subitems: • Login mode • Tools (Menu 4 Tools) • File • Module • Extras • Laser control • Configuration
2-4
Default setting for the customer/operator
SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010
Set user level Extras > Configuration > Card User management The TruTops Mark® software starts with the user level: "Customer" without password prompt and with all rights of the customer. Settings
User management dialog window
Fig. 2-1
Click the "Activate" checkbox. This activates the user management with the "Settings for the operator" in the dialog shown above. Having activated the user management, the system reacts as follows: • The additional "Operator" level is now available. The menu functions enabled on the "Operator" level can be configured individually. • On the "Customer" user level the password prompt is active. It cannot be deactivated. • On the "Operator" level the password prompt is active. It can be deactivated. • The default password for "Customer" is: customer • The default password for "Operator" is: worker
SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010
Default setting for the customer/operator
2-5
Password for the customer
Password: customer PW_setup_customer
Fig. 2-2
Password for the operator
Password: worker PW_setup operator
2-6
Default setting for the customer/operator
Fig. 2-3
SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010
The following descriptions refer to the checkboxes that have to be clicked.
User management_1
Fig. 2-4
Login mode
"Necessary to log in" activated There is no password prompt "Logging" activated The login as operator or customer is recorded
File
Activate "Open marking file" The operator is also permitted to load a marking file Activate "Load sequential program" The operator is also permitted to load a marking file
Module
Tools
SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010
Activate "Selection and start" The operator is permitted to select and start modules 3-9 Activate "Access to the function key panel" The operator is permitted to operate the function key bar Activate "Access to the configuration" The operator is permitted to select the configurationen "Selection and start" The operator is permitted to select and start tools 1-6.
Default setting for the customer/operator
2-7
User management 2
Fig. 2-5
Extras
Activate "Selection of status views" The operator is permitted to select status views 2-6: • I/O status • Marking preview • Laser parameter • Error history • RTC status Activate "Perform registry backups " The operator is permitted to carry out a registry backup Activate "Delete VCT files" The operator is permitted to delete the current VCT file and/or all VCT files Activate "Access to the function of status view" The operator has access to the functions of the status display.
2-8
Default setting for the customer/operator
SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010
Laser control
Activate "Laser on/off" The operator is permitted to switch the laser on and off via the "Laser_F2" button Activate "Shutter open/close" The operator is permitted to open or close the shutter via the "Shutter_F3" botton Activate "Pilot laser on/off" The operator is permitted to switch the pilot laser on and off via the"Pilot laser_F5" button Activate "Laser reset" The operator is permitted to shut down the laser via the"Reset_F4" button Activate "Start and cancel marking processes" The operator is permitted to start and cancel the marking procedure via the "Marking file_F11" button. Activate "Scanner calibriation" Tip Scanner calibration can only be activated if the corresponding hardware is provided. The operator can carry out an automatic scanner calibration via "2 Laser > 3 Scanner >1 Set reference values" and "2 Laser > 3 Scanner > 2 Calibriation".
SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010
Default setting for the customer/operator
2-9
User management 3
Configuration
Fig. 2-6
Activate "Pilot laser" The operator is permitted to configure the pilot laser in the laser menu via the submenu "Pilot laser configuration" Activate "Multiple marking" The operator is permitted to enter the number of markings in the laser menu via the submenu "Multiple marking". Activate "Machine" The operator is permitted to carry out settings in the Extras > Configuration > "Cards" > "Machine" menu Activate "GUI" The operator is permitted to carry out settings in the Extras > Configuration > "Cards" > "GUI" menu Activate "Directories" The operator is permitted to carry out settings in the Extras > Configuration > "Cards" >"Directories" menu
2-10
Default setting for the customer/operator
SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010
Activate "Digital interface" The operator is permitted to carry out settings in the Extras > Configuration > "Cards" > "Digital interace" menu Activate "Miscellaneous" The operator is permitted to carry out settings in the Extras > Configuration > "Cards" > "Miscellaneous" menu Activate "Marking on the fly" The operator is permitted to carry out settings in the Extras > Configuration > "Cards" > "Marking on the fly" menu Activate "Options" The operator is permitted to carry out settings in the Extras > Configuration > "Cards" > "Options" menu
SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010
Default setting for the customer/operator
2-11
2.1
Enable option at customer
To enable an option purchase the activation code from the sales department. This activation code is allocated via the equipment number. The activation code consists of 16 alphanumeric digits. Entry in TruTops Mark is via the menu path Extras > Configuration > Options.
Enabled options
Fig. 2-7
In the group field "Enabled options" select the requested option by clicking the corresponding checkbox. When the box has been checked, 4 free fields open on the right for entering the activation code. Enter the activation code and confirm with "OK". After the restart of TruTops Mark the option is available.
2-12
Default setting for the customer/operator
SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010
3.
Optional settings
Enabling ex works or at customer (refer to 2.1).
3.1
Navigator
The navigator helps the operator to promptly find, adjust, and optimize the appropriate laser parameters for the marking task. The navigator can be started in 2 ways. Click the "Navigator" button in the tools bar of the CAD Editor or select the "Navigator" function from the "Laser" menu. The "Navigator" dialog window opens. Set the "Navigator" dialog window by selecting the "Help" checkbox in the group field "Extra", according to the figure shown below. A help field opens displaying the next steps. TRUMPF recommends this procedure. The navigator is operated via 5 group fields and 6 buttons.
"Navigator" dialog window
SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010
Optional settings
Fig. 2-8
2-13
Group field Extra Both checkboxes can be selected at the same time. Select "Additional information" The detailed axial marking with pulse frequency, speed, etc. is displayed. Select "Help" The next steps for the operator are displayed in the help field.
Group field Material It is possible to select the marking material. One or several processes are assigned to each material. Select the material and the requested process. Note Take notice of the help field with the display of the next step. Material Ceramic Synthetic Metal
2-14
Optional settings
Group field Process Engraving Foaming or carbonisation Annealing, Deep engraving (Quality), Deep engraving (Speed), White engraving, Black engraving, Ablation
SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010
Group field Process The processes which can be used change their color from grey to black. The option fields highlighted in white can be selected. If several options are offered you have to decide on an option. Note Take notice of the help field with the display of the next step.
SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010
Material ceramic
Fig. 2-9
Optional settings
2-15
Group field Content You can select the options "Area" or "Line/Text". If you want to assign a hatching to an area, select the "Area" option. It is not possible to assign a hatching to a line. If you want to create a text, select the "Line/Text" option. Select the "Area" option Take notice of the "Help" group field with the display of the next step. Preview button Click the Preview button. The next steps (1-6) are displayed in the help field. The following figure appears:
Preview Ceramic dialog window
2-16
Optional settings
Fig. 2-10
SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010
Group field Matrix Optimal field: Enter the coordinates of your best result for your "Optimal field" (e.g.: A0). Selection of the lines is via the letters (e.g.: A-F); the columns are selected via the digits (e.g.: 0-4). By clicking your Optimal field (e.g.: A0) with the mouse, it will be entered in the "Matrix" group field at "Optimal field".
Preview Ceramic dialog window
Fig. 2-11
Example: Optimal field: Enter A0 Result of the 6th step
SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010
Optional settings
2-17
Preview button After pressing the "Preview" button, the adequate matrix appears in the main window. The matrix can be enlarged or reduced (zoom in/zoom out), depending on the space available on the material to be marked.
Fig. 2-12
Example: The "Line/Text" option is activated in the "Content" group field, and the "Additional information" checkbox is activated in the "Extra" group field.
2-18
Optional settings
SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010
When is it reasonale to use the "Zoom"? After you have carried out test markings and checked your material, it is time to identify the best parameter set by means of the zoom. Then the parameter set must tbe saved to carry out the marking. Zoom button In addition it is possible to display a certain area more precisely (refer to Fig. 2-13). Example: the speeds between 25 and 800 mm/s (left) are to be be changed to 412 to 606 mm/s (right). This can be achieved by selecting these objects with the mouse and press the "Zoom" button. A new matrix of the same size is displayed, showing the speeds between 412 und 606 mm/s. This results in a reduced step size.
Fig. 2-13
Pilot laser button Press the "Pilot laser on" button. The pilot laser is activated. So the material can be correctly positioned. Then press the "Pilot laser" button once more. The pilot laser is switched off. Marking button Having determined the area to be marked by means of the pilot laser, press the "Marking" button. OK button The parameters are adopted in the initial or starting file of the CAD. Cancel button The dialog is closed, followed by a reset to the initial or starting file of the CAD.
SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010
Optional settings
2-19
Fig. 2-14
Having ended the navigator, the selected laser parameter (test01) has been adopted in the CAD. This parameter can be assigned to an object via the drop-down combination field, or executed further via the "Global and internal parameters" button, if, e.g., color, output, or Z offset values are to be changed. If an area has been marked with the mouse, the used hatching is also adopted. It can, as usual, be called up via "Fill" or "Laser > Hatch styles".
Display Help (operating sequence) The next steps of the workflow are displayed.
2-20
Optional settings
SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010
3.2 Prerequisite
Display laser power (LPM)
The laser shutter must be closed and all TruTops Mark inputs and outputs must be deactivated. Start the measuring cycle directly via menu: "4 Tools > 9 LPM"
Fig. 2-15
The following dialog window opens and the measurement starts when you press "F2 Start".
Fig. 2-16
The measurement will take approx. 3 minutes. Afterwards you are requested to confirm or change the name of the log file. The dialog window is closed by pressing "F9 Exit" . The measured value is saved in this log file (*.txt) and can be redout from there.
SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010
Optional settings
2-21
Fig. 2-17
The log file content consists of the following information: • Date in the international format: DD.MM.YYYY • Behind it the time in the international format: HH:MM:SS • Measuring time in (s) seconds • Rated value of the laser power in (W) • fqs: Frequency (Hz) • tqs: Pulse duration (us)
Fig. 2-18
2-22
Optional settings
SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010
3.3
Calibrate laser power (LPC)
During calibration the laser power is set to an optimum value. This is done by adjusting the pump module power in several steps. After each step the laser power is checked until it has reached the admissible range. This process is executed after you have pressed the "Start F2" button. Cause
The laser power has to be calibrated when: • The laser power decreases • Pump modules have been replaced • The marking results no longer correspond to the original image, even though no parameter has been changed • The cover slide has been cleaned
Laser marking system TruMark 6330 cannot be calibrated! Prerequisite To guarantee that cooler and beaming source are in the thermally steady state, LPC may only be started if the conditions • Supply unit on • Laser on have at least met the times given in the table below. Since "Laser on" can be executed during the warm-up period of the supply unit (SU), the minimum waiting times given in column 3 have to be complied with. Exception
Time periods before calibration is started. Laser Via TruTops marking Mark-/TruDiag SU on [min] system button Laser on (LMS) [min]
Start LPC possible after [min] at the earliest
TM 3010
20
10
20
TM 3020
20
10
20
TM 3130
20
10
20
TM 3230
40
10
40
TM 5020
5
-----
5
TM 6020
20
20
40
TM 6030
20
20
40
TM 6130
20
20
40
TM 6140
20
20
40
TM 6230
40
20
60
1
SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010
1
Calibriation can take several minutes.
Optional settings
2-23
Start calibration process directly via the "4 Tools >10 LPC" menu
Fig. 2-19
1
Parameter
2
Values
3
Status
4
Display of the status texts in English
5
Display of laser power during a certain time
6.
Tool bar Fig. 2-20
Depending on the laser marking system, parameters may also be hidden. The dialog window is closed by pressing "F9".
2-24
Optional settings
SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010
3.4
Pilot laser
The pilot laser emits low-power red light through the laser optics. Marking operations are simulated with the pilot laser for setting-up purposes before the actual marking. It serves as: • a setting-up aid to position workpieces on the marking field of the laser marking system, • an aid to test marking operations. There is a slight difference between the beam of the pilot laser and the actual marking laser due to the different wavelengths, these are automatically corrected in TruTops Mark®.
SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010
Optional settings
2-25
Operating modes The pilot laser can be used in two different operating modes: • Operating mode 1: "Rectangle" • Operating mode 2: "Outline" Proceed as follows: •
In the laser menu activate the "Pilot laser setup" function. The "Pilot laser setup" dialog window appears on the screen.
Pilot laser setup
"Pilot laser setup" dialog window
Fig. 2-21
•
Click the checkbox in front of "Rectangle".
•
Activate the box "Endless marking". A tick then appears in the box. As a result the pilot laser marks when marking is started later until the operation is terminated with or by pressing ("Pilot laser off") by the customer/operator.
•
When using a TruMark Station and without segmentation, activate the box "Restart after marking". A tick then appears in the box. As a result the pilot laser will restart automatically after the marking process.
•
Click the OK button. The dialog box is then closed.
The operating mode has then been selected.
2-26
Optional settings
SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010
Note If the box "Endless marking" is not activated, the simulation is terminated after one operation. Rectangle operating mode If the "Rectangle" operating mode is selected, the pilot laser describes a rectangle or square on the marking field. The maximum expansion of the drawing in the X and Y directions is shown with this external frame. Outline operating mode In this mode the pilot laser replicates the graphic of the marking file completely, i.e. all individual outlines are displayed in the programmed sequence.
Activating the pilot laser When the operating mode has been selected you can activate the pilot laser.
Switching the pilot laser off
•
Click the "ˆF5 Pilot laser" button or press + at the same time.
•
In connection with a TruMark Station click the "F5 Pilot laser on" button or press the function key . – In the readiness display area of the marking interface the indicator lights up in light green to the left of "Pilot laser on". – The shutter of the working laser is automatically closed. Laser light with 1064 nm, 532 nm or 355 nm cannot be emitted.
•
Click the "F12 Marking" button or press the function key.
•
Click the F4 button on the start screen of the TruTops Mark® program or press the function key or the key combination . – The indicator next to "Pilot laser off" goes out.
The pilot laser corresponds to laser class 2! Although this is low intensity it can still damage your eyes. ¾
Never look directly into a beam.
WARNING
SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010
Optional settings
2-27
3.5
Matrix generator
Introduction The matrix generator supports the simple generation and maintenance of marking files for a double-head system. All required files are maintained in an access database. The database structure contains the following tables:
Fig. 2-22
2-28
Optional settings
SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010
SemiConJob
This is the starting table. The selection of a chips is done via JobCode. Field name
Content
jobId
Definite ID (is automatically allocated)
jobCode
Job code
jobVLFFilename
Complete file name including directory for a marking file (*VLF) with the marking content.
jobBinningFilename
Complete file name including directory with the binning marking file (*VLF) with all laser parameters required.
jobMatrixFilename
Complete file name including directory with the newly generated marking file (*VLF) with the matrix layout on all chips.
jobCreate
Date/time of the first creation.
jobUpdate
Date/time of the last change. Tab. 2-1
BaseStripGroupRows
This table contains the distances between the groups in Y direction Field name
Content
bsrId
Definite ID (is automatically allocated)
jobId
Reference on related job
bsrDistance
Distance in mm Tab. 2-2
BaseStripGroupColumns
This table contains the distances between the groups in X direction Field name
Content
bsrId
Definite ID (is automatically allocated)
jobId
Reference on related job
bscDistance
Distance in mm Tab. 2-3
SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010
Optional settings
2-29
BasStripProperties
This table contains the definition for the matrix. Field name
Content
bspId
Definite ID (is automatically allocated)
bspStepX
Step size per field in X direction in mm
bspStepY
Step size per field in Y direction in mm
bspLowerLeftX
Lower left corner in X direction of the 1st field in mm
bspLowerLeftY
Lower left corner in Y direction of the 1st field in mm
bspColumns
Number of columns
bspColumnDistance
Column distance
bspRows
Number of rows
bspRowsDistance
Row distance
bspGroupColumns
Groups of columns
bspGroupDistanceColumns
Number of groups in X direction
bspGroupRows
Groups of rows
bspGroupDistanceRows
Number of groups in Y direction
bspChipX
Chip dimension in X direction in mm
bspChipY
Chip dimension in Y direction in mm
bspChipZ
Chip dimension in Z direction in mm
bspChipRotate
Chip dimension in rotary direction in mm
jobId
Reference on related job
bspX
Still unused
bspY
Still unused
bspZ
Still unused
bspUpperRightForStrip
Reference point top right (center of group)
bspRelativeShiftX
Relative distance to X
bspRelativeShiftY
Relative distance to Y
bspXOffsetHeadA
Head A: set x value
bspYOffsetHeadA
Head A: set y value
bspAngleHeadA
Head A: set angle specification
bspXOffsetHeadB
Head B: set x value
bspYOffsetHeadB
Head B: set y value
bspAngleHeadB
Head B: set angle specification Tab. 2-4
2-30
Optional settings
SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010
Chip
This table contains the definitions for the chip. Field name
Content
chId
Definite ID (is automatically allocated)
jobId
Reference on related job
chrow
Row
chColumn
Column
chPosition
Rotation angle of a chip (0; 90; 180; 270 degrees)
chXOffset
Individual offset to chip position in X direction on head A
chYOffset
Individual offset to chip position in Y direction on head A
chMarkingSW
True = Mark; False = do not mark
chBinning
Information on quality are then assigned to the respective chip via the "Quality" variable. Tab. 2-5
Binning In the semiconductor industry it is demanded that certain chips must not be marked retroactively (dynamic) because on the basis of a quality process, individual chips have been designated as unusable. This quality process is called "Binning"; it assigns the quality characteristics to each chip.
SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010
Optional settings
2-31
Operation The matrix generator supports the simple generation and maintenance of marking files for a double-head system. Start the matrix generator directly via: "4 Tools > 7 MatrixGenerator"
Fig. 2-23
2-32
Optional settings
SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010
After starting the matrix generator, the following display appears:
1 2 3
4
5
5.1
5.2 1
Menu bar
2
Tool bar (6 tools are used)
3
Cards
4
Input field
5
Status bar
5.1
Display designation
5.2
Display marking file
5.3
Display of row and column
Matrix generator application
SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010
5.3
Fig. 2-24
Optional settings
2-33
Menu bar Exit The matrix generator can be closed via: • menu "1 File> 1 Exit" or • key combination Start It is possible to generate a "Job" as a XML file and store a marking file in the access database via "2 Save".
Help The following is displayed: • product name • version • copyright
Tool bar Generate XML file for generation of matrix files and binning files Save for data transfer to the access database Zoom in Zoom in in the preview
Zoom out Zoom out in the preview
Press left arrow In the preview the entire matrix is displayed in gray. After pressing the left arrow, the selected area is displayed in yellow and it is possible to continue operation. Press right arrow Select individual areas which are not meant to belong to the yellow area and mark with the "Right arrow".
2-34
Optional settings
SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010
Cards Administration is operated with the group fields: • Matrix • Matrix description Marking field/Matrix is operated with the group fields: • Matrix configuration • Marking field • Shift • Head A • Head B Preview is operated with: • Offset X (pasting position X) • Offset Y (pasting position Y) • Angle (0, 90, 180, 270 degrees) • Classification • Display or hide the marking preview
Input field White fields where no input has been made yet show a little blue triangle on the left upper corner of the input field. The entered text is displayed in bold type. Fields which are currently handled change the color from white to yellow. As soon as the input is finished, the background color changes back again to white.
If an invalid value has been entered, the background color changes to red.
SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010
Optional settings
2-35
Card Administration Recommended procedure
Select an existing matrix, optimize it according to the new requirements, assign a new name, and save the matrix for reproduction. Select the drop down arrow to open the drop down list via the "Administration" card in the group field "Matrix". Select an existing "Matrix". As an example, "Test_elexir" has been selected in the figure below.
Matrix selection
2-36
Optional settings
Fig. 2-25
SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010
The selected matrix name "Test_elexir" is displayed.
Matrix
Fig. 2-26
5 buttons are availble for further handling: Nr.
Buttons
1
"Read"
Notes Reuse existing files
2
"New"
Create new file
3
"Delete"
Delete file
4
"Import"
Import file
5
"Export"
Export file
Having selected the "Read" button, the "Read" button is displayed in gray and the group field "Matrix description" is indicated:
SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010
Matrix description
Fig. 2-27
Optional settings
2-37
Created at Date of the original creation of the loaded marking file is displayed. Updated at Date of the upgrade of the loaded marking file is displayed. Matrix file name Path with new matrix file name is displayed. Binning file name Path with new binning file name is displayed.
Card Marking field/Matrix
Marking field/Matrix
2-38
Optional settings
Fig. 2-28
SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010
Group field Configuration Width (X) Total width in X direction in mm Length (Y) Total length in Y direction in mm Pitch (X) Pitch width in X direction in mm Pitch (Y) Pitch length in Y-Richtung in mm Columns Number of rows per group
55
55
55
Fig. 2-29
Group columns Number of groups arranged in columns Group distance Distance from group center to group center in mm Rows Number of rows Group rows Number of groups arranged in rows Group distance Distance from group center to group center in mm
SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010
Optional settings
2-39
Reference point top right (group center)
2
4
5
1 3
5
Workpiece Fig. 2-30
Checkboxes not activated
Checkboxes activated
1
X start lower left (field center) in mm
3
X start top right (group center) in mm
2
Y start lower left (field center) in mm
4
Y start top right (group center) in mm
2-40
Optional settings
SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010
Group field Marking field
Y = 180
X = 335
25
155
X
Marking field width (X) in mm
Y
Marking field length (Y) in mm
Overlap
Dimension 25 in mm
A, B
Marking area of head A and head B Fig. 2-31
Head Selection Dual for double head system or Single for single head system Width (X) Total width of the double head system in mm Length (Y) Total length of the double head system in mm Overlap The overlapping marking area (25 mm) can be marked from either head A or head B Group field Shift X offset (X starting value) Shift in X direction from the marking field of the heads to the matrix (workpiece)
SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010
Optional settings
2-41
Y offset (Y starting value) Shift in Y direction from the marking field of the heads to the matrix (workpiece)
Group field Head A X offset (X starting value) Starting position of head A, if marking starts in X direction Y offset (Y starting value) Starting position of head A, if marking starts in Y direction Angle Starting position of the head with set angle gradient Group field Head B X offset (X starting value) Starting position of head B, if marking starts in X direction Y offset (Y starting value) Starting position of head B, if marking starts in Y direction Angle Starting position of the head with set angle gradient
2-42
Optional settings
SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010
Card Preview Matrix color gray yellow blue
Meaning Standard Selected fields Newly used fields for marking
Fig. 2-32
X offset (X starting value) Starting value of the field position in X direction Y offset (Y starting value) Starting value of the field position in Y direction Angle 0, 90, 180, 270 degrees Binning 4-digit arrangement of letters and digits Standard: ABCD, all fields are displayed in gray
SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010
Optional settings
2-43
Checkbox Marking Fields to be marked are displayed in blue. Press OK, then save and generate XML file. The file is adopted. Button OK Adopt fields with the OK button and save as marking file (blue fields). Button Cancel Matrix generator is canceled
1
2
3
4
5
1
Preview: Schematic display of matrix width (X) x lenght (Y)
2
Left arrow pressed (whole matrix is selected and displayed in yellow)
3
Select a field with a mouse click to activate right arrow; press right arrow and select individual fields (yellow) which will be marked later in a nonstandard way
4
Standard preview (gray), select individual fields with right arrow (displayed in yellow) and then press right arrow once more
5
Manipulate yellow fields by offset, angle, etc., then classify, mark, press OK, and save as marking file.
Marking areas
2-44
Fig. 2-33
Optional settings
SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010
3.6
Imager
The "Imager" allows to mark grayscale pictures quickly and in high quality. Prerequisite
The use of the "Imager" requires certain prerequisites as to the hardware. Please contact the TRUMPF sales department.
Imager
Fig. 2-34
If the option "Imager" is enabled, the additional card "Bitmap" appears in the dialog window "Administrate laser parameters". If the checkbox "Imager" is activated, the following applies: • During the fast bitmap marking, each pixel row is run through just once; the requested shade of gray is set by variation of the pulse energy from pixel to pixel. • During the fast marking of grayscale bitmaps only one single laser parameter is allocated to the entire bitmap. Additional characteristics are assigned to this laser parameter which enable a variable pulse energy. If the checkbox "Imager" is not activated, the usual procedure applies: • The bitmap is lasered in the so-called dithering procedure. • In case several shades of gray are used, each of them is represented by a separate laser parameter. These are combined in a sequence which is assigned to the bitmap. • In case several shades of gray are used, these are marked one after another. Thus the pixel rows of the bitmap are run through frequently, corresponding to the number of shades of gray.
SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010
Optional settings
2-45
Import bitmap The bitmap import is carried out analog to the usual procedure. It is recommended to prepare the bitmap to be imported in a way that size, number of shades of gray, and spatial resolution correspond to the bitmap to be marked. Marking errors can thus be avoided, which can otherwise occur due to pixel averaging during the bitmap import. The following procedure is recommended: 1) Select the option "Do not modify" via the "Bitmaps" card in group field "Color depth" and confirm with "OK".
Import of bitmaps
Fig. 2-35
The directory C:\Trumark\Vlf\Greyscale contains special bitmaps which can be used for optimization. Select the test file with the requested resolution which is designated "grey_scale_xxxdpi" or "grey_scale_steps_xxxdpi", and import the file as described here.
2-46
Optional settings
SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010
2) Select the requested bitmap file under Draw Æ Bitmap.
Grayscale charts and test bitmaps
Fig. 2-36
3) Maintain the preset original size as far as possible.
Bitmaps size
Fig. 2-37
4) Position the bitmap and maintain the original resolution as far as possible.
Resolution
Fig. 2-38
Note We recommend resolutions between 300 dpi and 800 dpi. A high resolution normally offers an improved marking quality, with the disadvantage that the marking period increases.
SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010
Optional settings
2-47
Assign laser parameters Allocate a laser parameter to the bitmap and activate the "Imager" (fast bitmap marking) for this parameter. Mark the imported bitmap on the requested workpiece. The following optimization is carried out on the basis of the marking result. Adjust the pixel size. Adjoining pixels should contact in such a way that no white ranges occur between adjoining black pixels. This can be seen in the black area of the marked grayscale chart. Adjustment of the pixel size is carried out via the parameter "Defocussing". In case the density is too strong or too weak, it can be optimized with the parameters "Power" or "Pulse frequency". At first adjust the pulse frequency. To do so it is advisable to set the power to 95% and increase the pulse frequency as long as the grayscale chart contains a sufficiently deep black. This guarantees that the marking period is minimized. In case no sufficiently deep black can be created despite low pulse frequences and maximum power, increase the resolution of the bitmap and at the same time reduce "Defocussing".
Assign main LP
Fig. 2-39
Note High pulse frequencies can result in marking errors. In this case select a lower pulse frequency and carry out the reduction via the "Power" parameter. During the fast bitmap marking, the parameters "Velocity" and "Pulse frequency" are inactive. The speed is preset by pulse frequency and resolution.
2-48
Optional settings
SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010
Optimize grayscale chart Optimization of the grayscale chart is carried out by determining the density range and the gamma value. Determine the density range Adjust the limits of the grayscale chart. This is done by determining the limits of the density range.
0%
20%
2
70%
100%
1
1 2
Density range 0% to 100% Density range 20% to 70%
Principle grayscale chart
Fig. 2-40
Gamma value Adjust the density progress within the grayscale chart. This is done by means of the gamma value.
0.3 1.0 3.0
Fig. 2-41
A gamma value of 1.0 means that the 256 shades of gray are linearly distributed over the set density range. With the help of the gamma value, adjust the density progress within the grayscale chart in such a way that the shades of gray are evenly distributed over the density range 2. Note Individual shades of gray can also be manually adjusted (refer to page 2-53).
SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010
Optional settings
2-49
Invert grayscale chart
Invert grayscale chart
Fig. 2-42
Particularly with regard to dark workpieces which become lighter by the laser pulse effect, it can be reasonable that a darker pixel (i.e. a higher density) corresponds to a lower pulse energy. In this case the progress of the shades of gray must be inverted. For this select the "Invert" checkbox.
Define marking direction
4 3 2 1 1 2 Marking direction
3 4 Fig. 2-43
By default bitmaps are dissected in pixel rows in such a way that they run along the longer extension of the bitmap. So the number of row changes is reduced and the marking period minimized.
2-50
Optional settings
SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010
You can influence the dissection in pixel rows by activating the "use other settings than standard" checkbox and selecting the marking direction. The following selection is provided: "auto": standard marking direction "x": marking direction horizontal "y": marking direction vertical Marking direction alternating 5 4 3 2 1
Marking direction alternating
Fig. 2-44
By selecting the "Alternating" checkbox the marking period is reduced because adjoining pixel rows are marked in opposite direction. The step length from one pixel row end to the next pixel row beginning is shortened. Lag delay A little displacement in direction of the pixel rows, which can occur between adjoining pixel rows during alternating marking, is eliminated by optimizing the lag delay.
Alternating and lag delay
SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010
Fig. 2-45
Optional settings
2-51
Other settings than standard The following settings require the know-how of bitmap marking. Therefore these settings should only be carried out by specially trained personnel. Mode 2 In case of very delicate workpieces it can be advantageous to use mode 2. Mode 2 guarantees that no laser radiation emits in the white bitmap ranges. Note Mode 2 results in more marking errors which requires to optimize smoothing and frame correction.
Bitmap mode
Fig. 2-46
Smoothing By means of the smoothing, it is possible to correct marking errors at the transitions between different shades of gray. It is recommended to carry out the optimization on the basis of a test bitmap. Adequate bitmaps can be found in the C:\Trumark\Vlf\Greyscale directory.
2-52
Optional settings
SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010
Frame correction By means of the frame correction it is possible to correct marking errors at the beginning of a pixel row. Note If the selected values for the smoothing or frame correction are too high, individual pixels can be lacking particularly at the beginning of a pixel row. Adjust shades of gray manually The displayed percent values refer to the interval within the set limits of the density range 2 (refer to Fig. 2-40). The density level can later be manually changed for each individual shade of gray. Note On the basis of the set gamma value, the software calculates the density level for each shade of gray. Density level values entered manually are deleted by other inputs! Loss of the manually entered values. CAUTION
¾
Do not change the number of shades of gray or the gamma value after the density levels have been manually optimized.
White levels Occurring damages of workpieces when dealing with white pixels can be counteracted my means of the white levels. A selectable number of the lightest shades of gray can be set on the minimal possible pulse energy.
White levels
SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010
Fig. 2-47
Optional settings
2-53
2-54
Optional settings
SW-EN-TTM-02-00 02/2010
Chapter 3
Marking interface
SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010
1. 1.1 1.2
Starting and exiting TruTops Mark® ............................ 3-3 Starting............................................................................. 3-3 Exiting .............................................................................. 3-3
2. 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4
Start screen .................................................................... 3-4 Running a marking program ............................................ 3-5 Loading a marking program............................................. 3-6 Viewing the marking program .......................................... 3-7 Starting the marking program .......................................... 3-7
3. 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4
Working with the marking interface........................... 3-11 Buttons and function keys.............................................. 3-11 Status area .................................................................... 3-14 Starting the marking program ........................................ 3-20 Menus ............................................................................ 3-23
4. 4.1 4.2
File menu ...................................................................... 3-24 > 1 Open ........................................................................ 3-24 > 2 Exit........................................................................... 3-24
5.
Laser menu................................................................... 3-25
Starting and exiting TruTops Mark®
3-1
3-2
5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4
> 1 Pilot laser setup ....................................................... 3-25 > 2 Multiple marking ...................................................... 3-26 > 3 Scanner (Autocalibration) ........................................ 3-26 > 4 Reset ....................................................................... 3-27
6.
Module menu................................................................ 3-28
7. 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6 7.7 7.8 7.9 7.10
Tools menu................................................................... 3-29 > 1 CAD Editor............................................................... 3-29 > 2 Diagnostics tool ....................................................... 3-29 > 3 Supply unit simulator ............................................... 3-30 > 4 QuickFlow ................................................................ 3-30 > 5 Error display............................................................. 3-31 > 6 TLV Test Tool .......................................................... 3-32 > 7 MatrixGenerator....................................................... 3-33 > 8 GridGenerator.......................................................... 3-33 > 9 Check laser power................................................... 3-33 > 10 Calibrate laser power............................................. 3-33
8. 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6
Extras menu ................................................................. 3-34 > 1 Change user level.................................................... 3-35 > 2–6 Change status displays ....................................... 3-36 > 7 Configuration ........................................................... 3-36 > 8 Registry backup ....................................................... 3-46 > 9 Delete current VCT files .......................................... 3-46 > 10 Delete all VCT files ................................................ 3-47
9. 9.1 9.2
Workstation menu ....................................................... 3-48 > 1 Referencing ............................................................. 3-48 > 2 Configuration ........................................................... 3-48
10. 10.1 10.2
Help menu .................................................................... 3-50 > 1 TruTops Mark®......................................................... 3-50 > 2 Info........................................................................... 3-50
11. 11.1 11.2 11.3 11.4 11.5 11.6 11.7
Modules ........................................................................ 3-51 Control with external data communication..................... 3-51 Control with workstation................................................. 3-52 Control with digital interface........................................... 3-53 QuickFlow control .......................................................... 3-53 Control with serial interface ........................................... 3-53 Control with TCP/IP interface ........................................ 3-54 Control with COM interface............................................ 3-54
Starting and exiting TruTops Mark®
SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010
1.
Starting and exiting TruTops Mark®
1.1
Starting
The TruTops Mark® program is automatically started when the laser marking system is switched on. The program runs on Windows XP and can be restarted when the program has been exited and without switching the laser marking system off in the same manner as other Windows programs. TruTops Mark® is linked with this icon.
1.2
Exiting
You can exit the TruTops Mark® program by: • selecting the "Exit" item in the "File" menu or • pressing the key combination or • click the button ⌧ in the top right corner of the screen using the mouse.
SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010
Starting and exiting TruTops Mark®
3-3
2.
Start screen
The start screen (refer to Fig. 3-1) of the TruTops Mark® program contains: • A menu bar and buttons for controlling the program functions and the laser • A status area with indicators With the TruTops Mark® program you can: • Control all the laser marking system functions • Generate marking programs • Start marking programs • Select sequential programs • Edit sequential programs • Start sequential programs • Using different tools, settings specific to hardware and software are tested, monitored and changed.
TruTops Mark® start screen
3-4
Start screen
Fig. 3-1
SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010
2.1
Running a marking program
This main section describes how to load and then start a marking program. If your laser marking system features a pilot laser (option), you can execute a marking program for set-up purposes with the pilot laser. Chapter 2 describes how to proceed. If you have not already saved a marking program on the computer of your laser marking system or if you do not have any experience with the content and generation of marking programs, please read Chapter 3, Section 3.
SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010
Start screen
3-5
2.2 Loading a marking program
Loading a marking program
1. Press the function key
or click the "Marking file" button. The "Load CAD file" dialog opens on the screen.
"Load CAD file" dialog window
Fig. 3-2
2. Select the required marking program. 3. Click the "Open" button. The dialog disappears. The path and the name of the selected marking program is contained in the "marking file" line.
"Marking file" line
Fig. 3-3
The selected marking program is loaded and can be started.
3-6
Start screen
SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010
2.3
Viewing the marking program
Select the "Mark preview" option in the "Extras" menu to preview an image of the loaded marking program.
Mark preview
Fig. 3-4
When the correct marking program is loaded, proceed with Section 2.4 to start the marking program.
2.4
Starting the marking program
Prerequisites: • The focus between the workpiece and the lens has been set correctly. • The emergency circuit is closed. • The laser is ready.
Status "Emergency circuit open"
Fig. 3-5
When the emergency circuit is open, the status display "Emergency circuit open" is red. When the emergency circuit is closed, it is gray. When you perform the steps described below, the marking content of the loaded marking program is transferred to your workpiece with the laser.
SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010
Start screen
3-7
Preparation
1. Place a workpiece onto the marking field of the laser marking system.
Positioning the workpiece
Fig. 3-6
2. If a protection cover is provided: Close the cover.
Status "Safety circuit open"
Fig. 3-7
The status "Safety circuit open" changes from red to gray.
3-8
Start screen
SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010
3. Press the function key or click the "Laser" button. The laser is switched on.
The status "Laser on" switches from gray to yellow to green. 4. Press the function key or click the "Shutter" button. The shutter is opened. The Q-switch remains closed. No laser light is emitted. The status display "Shutter open" changes from gray to yellow and after a short time to green. All preparatory work has then been completed for marking. Note When marking in connection with a TruMark Station, the configuration can be set so that the laser is switched on during start-up and the shutter is opened.
During the next step laser radiation is emitted from the lens. WARNING
Laser radiation can burn your skin and cause permanent damage to your eyes. If the laser protection cover is either open or missing, wear laser protection goggles with glasses which are suitable for the wavelength of the laser light. – Laser marking systems: with wavelength 1064 nm (infrared) with wavelength 532 nm (green) with wavelength 355 nm (ultraviolet) Never put your hand between the lens and the workpiece. Never look into the lens.
SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010
Start screen
3-9
Starting the marking program
5. Press the function key
or click the "Marking" button.
The laser marking system then runs the marking program. The laser radiation is emitted with a high pulse power and marks the workpiece in accordance with the data in the marking program.
Running of the marking program
3-10
Start screen
Fig. 3-8
SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010
3.
Working with the marking interface
3.1
Buttons and function keys
The buttons can be used to activate the most important functions of the marking interface with the click of a mouse. The same functions can be selected by pressing the corresponding function keys on the keyboard. The function key is stated on the button. Example: To open the CAD you can either click the "F10 CAD" button shown here or the function key on the keyboard. If the function key name is preceded by "^", this key must be pressed while the key is held down. The buttons are combined in a vertical bar on the right-hand edge of the menu. Right-hand bar
SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010
Working with the marking interface
3-11
Buttons
The main buttons are explained in more detail on the following pages. The laser is switched on and off with the "^F2 Laser" button. The following functions are activated when the system is switched on: • Cooling on • Flow in cooling circuit checked • Laser on When the laser is switched on, the color of the icon on the button changes from black to yellow. The corresponding LED lights up on the system status display, first in yellow (the supply unit has received the command to switch the laser on). When the laser has been switched on, the color of the LED changes to green. Note When the "F2" button has been clicked, no laser light is emitted. This only occurs when the shutter has been opened and the marking operation started.
The "^F3 Shutter" button serves to make the laser ready for marking operations and also to cancel readiness for operation. When switching on, the expander shutter unit (ESU), will open. When the function is active, the color of the button icon changes from black to yellow, the color of the corresponding LED in the status display changes to green.
WARNING
When the laser exit opening and the marking field of the laser marking system are not accommodated inside a protective cover in accordance with laser protection class 1, direct or indirect exposure of the eyes to laser radiation is possible! Laser radiation can burn your skin and cause permanent damage to your eyes. If the laser protection cover is either open or missing, wear laser protection goggles with glasses which are suitable for the wavelength of the laser radiation. With the "^F4 Reset" button a reset of the supply unit can be initiated or the currently running marking operation can be cancelled in the event of an error.
3-12
Working with the marking interface
SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010
If your laser marking system contains a pilot laser, it can be switched on or off with this button. When the function is active, the color of the button icon changes from black to red. The pilot laser is described in more detail in Chapter 2 Section 3.4 "Pilot laser". Note If the marking operation is started when the pilot laser is activated, laser light of laser protection class 2 is emitted. With the "F10 CAD" button the CAD is started which is used to generate and modify marking programs. More detailed information on the CAD is given in Chapter 4.
The button "F11 Marking file" is used to load a marking program (from a hard disk, network, CD-ROM or floppy disk). The path and name of the selected marking program is displayed in the "marking file" line of the marking interface. With the "F12 Marking" button the currently selected marking program can be started with the marking laser or pilot laser. When the laser is ready the marking operation is run in the set mode.
WARNING
When the laser exit opening and the marking field of the laser marking system are not accommodated inside a protective cover in accordance with laser protection class 1, direct or indirect exposure of the eyes to laser radiation is possible!! Laser radiation can burn your skin and cause permanent damage to your eyes. If the laser protection cover is either open or missing, wear laser protection goggles with glasses which are suitable for the wavelength of the laser radiation.
SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010
Working with the marking interface
3-13
3.2 System status
Status area
The status area shows the condition of the laser, the pilot laser and the laser marking system. This area is divided into three sections.
1
2
3
System status
Fig. 3-9
The top section (1) of "System status" displays the condition of the following parameters: • Speed of the laser in mm/s • Power of the laser in percentage of the maximum power • Cycle time, i.e. the duration of a cycle in seconds (in the cycle time with a TruMark Station, for example, the time for closing the doors is also included) • Pulse repetition frequency of the laser in Hz • Defocus, i.e. the current displacement of the focus position of the laser beam in relation to the focusing distance of the employed optics in millimeters (refer to Chapter 4, "Laser menu" > "Laser parameters" > "Defocusing"). • Marking time, i.e. the duration of the actual marking operation in seconds. Ready indicators (2) are located on the lower left of the display field which light up in green when the different functions are ready. The right-hand part of the status section (3) contains red warning and error indicators which light up to point out possible problems. Note When the indicators "Safety circuit open", "Emergency circuit open" or "Error" light up, the laser is not ready and marking is not possible.
3-14
Working with the marking interface
SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010
Status display
The display in the lower section of the marking interface is variable and can be selected in the "Extras" menu (also refer to Section 7.7 "Extras menu"). Proceed as follows to select a setting: Click the "Extras" menu in the menu bar or Press the keys . The following displays can be selected: •
IO status: Shows the status of the digital interface of the laser marking system or the laser unit.
IO status
SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010
Working with the marking interface
Fig. 3-10
3-15
•
•
Mark preview: The display field shows the marking program on which the current marking operation is based in a minimized version of the CAD. Various buttons are provided on the lefthand side for changing the view (refer to Section "View menu" in Chapter 4 for a more detailed description). Print: Via the print icon you will have access to the print dialog of your printer (refer to Section "File menu" in Chapter 4 for a more detailed description).
Mark preview
3-16
Working with the marking interface
Fig. 3-11
SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010
•
Laser parameters: Shows the status of the internal laser parameters. The current delays when the laser is switched on and off, at the ends of polygons and for laser jumps are displayed in microseconds. In addition, the current step and pulse width (in microseconds) and the jump speed (in millimeters per second) as well as the following offsets are shown: of the power (in percent), of the frequency (in hertz), of the speed (in millimeters per second) and of the defocus (in millimeters). It is also displayed whether the suppression of the first pulse is active. Please refer to Chapter 4 "Laser menu" > "Laser parameters" for more information on these parameters.
Status laser parameters
SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010
Working with the marking interface
Fig. 3-12
3-17
•
Error, warning history: This field shows a list of the errors and warnings which occurred last. The list contains the date and the time at which the respective error occurred, the error code and a short text in which the type of occurring error is described. Double-clicking on the message opens the detailed display.
Error, warning history
3-18
Working with the marking interface
Fig. 3-13
SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010
•
RTC status: The type, the mode and the installed options of the scanner card (RTC) are displayed at the top. In the lower half of the status display, the exact marking time and the list commands (microvectors) of the marking last started are shown. "Restart_mark" shows the number of markings which have been activated using the digital input Restart_mark. (Also see interface description.) When operating with marking on the fly (MOF) and an encoder, the number of pulses of the connected encoder are shown in the X counter and Y counter. The REI inputs and outputs are displayed: when selecting the entry field the assignment is shown.
RTC status
SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010
Working with the marking interface
Fig. 3-14
3-19
3.3
Starting the marking program
Proceed as follows to load a marking program: Selection of the marking program
• •
With the mouse click the "F11 Marking file" button or press the function key or select the menu item "File" > "Open". The "Load CAD file" dialog window appears on the screen. The marking program can be selected in this window.
"Load CAD file" dialog window
•
Fig. 3-15
When the dialog box has been closed, the name of the marking program is displayed in the "Marking file" line.
Check that the correct program has been selected: • In the "Extras" menu select the "Mark preview" option; the marking program on which the current marking operation is based is then displayed in a minimized version of the CAD. • The CAD can also be started with the "F10 CAD" button or the function key. The interface of the CAD with the graphic of the selected marking program appears in the drawing field.
3-20
Working with the marking interface
SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010
To execute a marking operation with the laser marking system certain prerequisites must be met: • activated laser marking system • started TruTops Mark® program • correctly set optics (refer to Section 8.3 "> 7 Configuration" > "Machine") • selected marking program
Execution
When the laser exit opening and the marking field of the laser marking system are not accommodated inside a protective cover in accordance with laser protection class 1, direct or indirect exposure of the eyes to laser radiation is possible! WARNING Laser radiation can burn your skin and cause permanent damage to your eyes. If the laser protection cover is either open or missing, wear laser protection goggles with glasses which are suitable for the wavelength of the laser radiation. Proceed as follows: • Place the workpiece into the marking field of the laser marking system (if necessary and fitted, use the pilot laser for alignment). • Ensure that the laser has the correct focus to the workpiece. • Close the protective cover if it is fitted.
SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010
•
Ensure that the marking surface is in the "Marking program" mode (also refer to the section "Buttons", "Marking program". If necessary click the "F7 Marking program" button or press the function key. (Only in conjunction with a TruMark Station).
•
Click the "^F2 Laser" button or press while holding down the key. The color of the icon on the "^F2 Laser" button changes from black to yellow.
Working with the marking interface
3-21
3-22
•
Click the "^F3 Shutter" button or press while holding down the key. The laser is run with the set power and the shutter is opened. The color of the icon on the "^F2 Laser" button changes from black to yellow.
•
Click the "F12 Marking" button or press the function key. On a TruMark Station alternatively the start key can be pressed. The laser marking system then performs the marking operation. During this operation high-power laser radiation is emitted and marks the workpiece in accordance with the set program. With a TruMark Station the door closes when the program is started and opens when it has been completed.
Working with the marking interface
SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010
3.4
Menus
A menu bar with the following menus is provided on the screen of the marking interface: • • • • • • •
File Laser Module Tools Extras Workstation Help
Menu bar
Fig. 3-16
The menus contain functions which can only be activated with the respective pull-down menu. The menu functions are activated either with the mouse or with the keyboard. Activation with the mouse: • Click the respective menu in the menu bar. – The corresponding pull-down menu opens. • Select the respective function in the pull-down menu. Activation with the keyboard: • Press the keys . – The corresponding pull-down menu appears on the screen. Note is the key with the number in front of the respective menu. Example: 1 File: is key 1. • Press the Hotkey of the required function in the pull-down menu or • move the highlighting bar to the correct position in the menu with the arrow keys.
SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010
Working with the marking interface
3-23
4.
File menu
File menu
4.1
Fig. 3-17
> 1 Open
This function can be used to open marking files which have been generated in the CAD. The opened file controls the marking operation of the laser. The "File" menu contains a list of the files which were opened last. These can be reopened by clicking with the mouse or by pressing the key.
4.2
> 2 Exit
This function terminates the TruTops Mark® program. This is also possible with the key combination or by clicking with the mouse in the exit box (top right).
3-24
File menu
SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010
5.
Laser menu
Laser menu
5.1
Fig. 3-18
> 1 Pilot laser setup
This submenu is provided for selecting the operating mode of the pilot laser (also refer to Chapter 2 Section 3.4 "Pilot laser"). Pilot laser -> Setup
"Pilot laser setup" dialog window
Fig. 3-19
Group field Mode Selection of whether the pilot laser should generate an "outline" or a "rectangle". Group field Mark settings Select "Endless marking" The pilot laser marks infinitely in the same way. Select "Restart after marking" After the marking process, the pilot laser restarts automatically only with a TruMark Station and without segmentation. Speed Setting of the pilot laser speed in millimeters per second.
SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010
Laser menu
3-25
5.2
> 2 Multiple marking
In this submenu it is possible to define how often the marking laser should execute the marking operation of the active marking file. The set value is reset to 1 by clicking the "Reset" button or by changing the marking file. Marking -> Setup
"Marking setup" dialog window
5.3
Fig. 3-20
> 3 Scanner (Autocalibration)
In this submenu it is possible to determine the reference values for scanner calibration by means of an automatic calibration. Click "3 Scanner > 1 Set reference values". Confirm the following "Calibration" message with "Yes".
Fig. 3-21
Then click "3 Scanner > 2 Start calibration". The calibration is carried out. In a further step it is also possible to switch the calibration off again by clicking "3 Scanner > 3 Turn off compensation".
3-26
Laser menu
SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010
5.4
> 4 Reset
This function reinitializes the laser. The "Reset" function must be activated after a warning or error message from the user. It also serves to terminate the currently active marking operation. If the marking operation is restarted, this starts again from the beginning. A marking operation can also be terminated with the key combination .
SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010
Laser menu
3-27
6.
Module menu
If TruTops Mark® is controlled by external systems or used to control a laser marking system or a laser unit, the marking interface on the right-hand side will be extended by one module. The required module can be started with the "Module" submenu. The started module appears in the right-hand display area of the marking interface. Information on the Module menu can be found in Section 11 "Modules".
3-28
Module menu
SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010
7.
Tools menu
The "Tools" menu can be used to start various programs with which the marking operation can be monitored, controlled and checked for errors. In addition the CAD can be started in this menu. In Chapter 2 more detailed descriptions on the options are given: • 7 MatrixGenerator • 8 GridGenerator • 9 LPM • 10 LPC
Tools menu
7.1
Fig. 3-22
> 1 CAD Editor
This function starts the CAD with which the marking programs are generated. You can find details on working with the CAD in Chapter 4, "CAD". Note The CAD can also be started in the marking interface by clicking on the button "F10 CAD" or by pressing the function key on the keyboard.
7.2
> 2 Diagnostics tool
This functions starts the diagnostics tool in which the system status of a large number of parameters of the laser device, especially of the control unit and the laser head, can be displayed and an error log output.
SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010
Tools menu
3-29
7.3
> 3 Supply unit simulator
This function starts the supply unit simulator for the laser marking system or the laser unit. This software is used to run the TruTopsMark® on a PC without a connected laser. Here various parameters on the supply unit and the parallel digital interface of the laser marking system/laser unit can be changed.
7.4
> 4 QuickFlow
This menu item only appears when the QuickFlow software extension is installed on your system (option). This function starts the TRUMPF QuickFlow-Editor. Complex sequential programs which control the entire marking cycle from beginning to end can be generated graphically by using QuickFlow. All interfaces for the laser marking systems can be controlled using QuickFlow, and data from external sources can be read out.The link to external databanks can be established efficiently. Also refer to the section "Control with external data communication". Details on the principle of operation of the QuickFlowEditor are contained in the separate documentation "QuickFlow Programming software for generating visual sequential programs".
3-30
Tools menu
SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010
7.5
> 5 Error display
This function opens a dialog window that serves to permit display of the error description (error display) for a certain error code. Note The error display is mainly provided for TRUMPF service technicians; if a customer reports an error code, the service technician can display the error description with this tool. Error display
"Error display" dialog window
Fig. 3-23
Id: Identification number of the component in which the error was signaled (e.g. CIP = 51, TruTops Mark®-SW = 53). Num: Number of the components as one component can be contained in the system several times. Code: Hexadecimal display of the error code.
SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010
Tools menu
3-31
Display button When this button is clicked, a window is opened which shows the effect, the cause, the necessary measures and possible other details of the occurred fault.
Error info
Fig. 3-24
The previous or next error message can be displayed by clicking either "Previous cause" or "Next cause". The window can be closed by clicking the "F9" button or by pressing the corresponding function key.
7.6
> 6 TLV Test Tool
If TruTops Mark® is controlled by the exchange of data with externals systems, this function permits the activation of a test tool with which TLV control commands for the serial commands for the serial interface, profibus, TCP/IP and COM interface can be tested. You can find information for the TLV control commands in the interface description "TLV commands and interpreter for TruTops Mark® software program".
3-32
Tools menu
SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010
7.7
> 7 MatrixGenerator
The corresponding description is given in Chapter 2, Section 3.5
7.8
> 8 GridGenerator
The corresponding description is given in Chapter 2, Section 3.6
7.9
> 9 Check laser power
The corresponding description is given in Chapter 2, Section 3.2
7.10 > 10 Calibrate laser power The corresponding description is given in Chapter 2, Section 3.3
SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010
Tools menu
3-33
8.
Extras menu
The user level can be changed in the "Extras" menu. It also permits the setting of various status displays in the left-hand lower range of the display area. In addition to this, different TruTops Mark® settings can be configured, a registry backup can be made, and the current or all VCT files can be deleted.
Extras menu
3-34
Extras menu
Fig. 3-25
SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010
8.1
> 1 Change user level
If this function is activated, a dialog window opens in which it is possible to change the user level. Change user level
"Change user level" dialog window
Fig. 3-26
There are two user levels available to the customer: • "Operator": This user level is not activated when the unit is supplied. The level can be activated in the menu "Extras" > "Configuration" > "User management". The operator works on this user level. Individual menu functions described in this documentation can be enabled or disabled on this level. Access of the operator can be restricted accordingly in this way. • "Customer": The customer works on this user level. It permits access to all functions of the marking interface described in this documentation. If the "Operator" level is not activated, the operator also works on this level. All options which have to be set for the operator are described in Chapter 2. • "Service": Access is restricted to the TRUMPF service personnel. On this user level it is possible to perform further service settings in the marking interface. A password is necessary for changing to this user level. • "Production": Access is restricted to the TRUMPF service personnel. On this user level it is possible to make basic settings in the marking interface. A password is necessary for changing to this user level. Note Basic settings for the program environment of the TruTops Mark® software are defined on the "Service" and "Production" levels. Access to these user levels is therefore only possible for TRUMPF service and production personnel.
SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010
Extras menu
3-35
8.2
> 2–6 Change status displays
In the "Extras" menu it is possible to select the status displays which should be shown in the bottom left hand display area of the marking interface. A description of the possible status displays and their functions is contained in Section 3.2 "Status area" > "Status displays".
8.3
> 7 Configuration
In this submenu it is possible to change various basic settings in the marking interface. > Configuration > Card Machine Settings
"Machine" dialog window
Fig. 3-27
The parameters described below can be defined in this dialog window. Group field Optics selection In the "Optic type" field the laser optics can be selected. If a new optic is selected, the values in the fields "Marking field" "Focus" and "Max. defocus" change accordingly. Only those optical systems which are available for the current system are offered.
3-36
Extras menu
SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010
Group field Laser offset In the entry fields the offset values are entered: in the field "Laser power" it is possible to enter an offset of the maximum laser power as a percentage; in addition the frequency and the laser speed as well as the defocus, i.e. the shifting of the focus position of the laser beam toward the focus distance of the used optic can be entered. The parameters affect all marking programs. As long as an offset is active, the corresponding display field appears in yellow in the system status, refer to Section 3.2. Group field XY-Table correction This function permits the adjustment of the marking area. If an offset should occur in the marking result if the XY-table is used, this can be compensated for by setting offset values. Both horizontal and vertical directions and the angle can be corrected. Group field Segmentation The starting point for the segmentation can be set with the offset values of the segmentation. The segmentation offset values have no effect if the "Take the axis position by segmentation" checkbox (configuration of the workstation module) is activated. The segmentation is started on the spot. The segmentation offset values are used if "Take the axis position by segmentation" is not activated. The offset values for the respective axes (A, X, Y and Z) are used as starting point for the segmentation.
SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010
Extras menu
3-37
> Configuration > Card GUI Settings
"GUI" (Graphical User Interface) dialog window
Fig. 3-28
The following parameters can be defined in this dialog window. Group field Language switching Enables the selection of 20 national languages at present. The following languages are available: German, English, French, Italian, Spanish, Dutch, Swedish, Danish, Finnish, Polish, Czech, Portuguese, Hungarian, Japanese, simplified Chinese, traditional Chinese, Korean, Malay, Turkish, and Rumanian. Group field Video sequence For playing short video clips during marking at the top right in the TRUMPF logo. Group field Units of measure for lengths Stipulates whether the lengths in the program are displayed as metric measurements ("SI units") or in inches (US/UK units).
3-38
Extras menu
SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010
Group field Operating mode Defines whether marking operations are actually performed ("Activate mechanical system" or only simulated ("Simulation"). Simulation mode serves to run the TruTops Mark® software on PCs without laser. After selecting "Activate mechanical system" the serial interface COM2 is assigned for controlling the mechanical axis (on a TruMark Station). The selection function "RTC card available" informs the TruTops Mark® software whether a scanner card is installed or not. Group field Start conditions Defines the behavior of the marking interface with a new start. If "Start last module" is activated, the software loads the last used display module (also refer to Section 10, "Modules"). If "Start last tool" is activated, the software loads the last settings made in the "Extras" menu (also refer to Section 7.7 "Extras menu"). If "Used last VLF directory" is activated, the software sets the path so that the marking programs generated with the CAD are loaded to the path which was last used. If the "Load last loaded marking file" is activated, CAD automatically loads the VLF file last opened when the software starts up. If "Delete VCT files" is activated, the software deletes the VCT files which were last generated. The marking programs generated in the CAD are automatically converted into VCT files by the TruTops ® Mark so that they can act as marking programs. If these are no longer required (for example to save space), they can be automatically deleted with this function. Note When the respective file is deleted, any existing variables (such as series numbers) are reset to their original values. When "Full Screen" is activated, the user interface uses the entire monitor. In the field "Laser power", you can set the percentage power value of the laser which the laser is to have when TruTops Mark® starts up.
SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010
Extras menu
3-39
> Configuration > Card Directories This window is used to define the standard directories for various file types with which the marking interface works. Settings
"Directories" dialog window
Fig. 3-29
The following file types can be assigned standard directories: • The CAD settings are saved in the file 'CAD-INI.XML'. • Marking programs which are generated in the CAD. • Font files, i.e. saved font information. • Snapshot files which are temporary marking files which are created with the snapshot function. (Refer to Chapter 3, "Laser" menu > "Snapshot".) • Vector files: TruTops Mark® converts loaded marking programs with the extension .VLF automatically into vector files with the extension .VCT, which contain the machine code of the marking program. • Mark files external control files: standard directory for the marking files when using the "Serial interface", "Digital interface", "Profibus", "TCP/IP" or "COM" modules.
3-40
Extras menu
SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010
> Configuration > Card Digital interface The inputs and outputs of the parallel digital interface of the laser marking system/laser unit can be activated/deactivated in this dialog window. When the inputs are activated, TruTops Mark® responds to each input of the digital interface. When these are deactivated, the digital inputs can be used elsewhere (QuickFlow, other modules) When the digital outputs are activated, TruTops Mark® uses these outputs according to their function. If these are deactivated, the outputs can be used elsewhere. Note The input "Restart_mark" / "Abort_mark" has a special function. When this input is activated, TruTops Mark switches over into the retrigger mode. The markings can no longer be started with "F12 marking". The marking files must firstly be loaded into the deflection card using the TLV command or QuickFlow. The marking itself will then be immediately started by means of this input. Settings
"Digital interface" dialog window
Fig. 3-30
Details on the principle of operation of the interface are given in the extra interface description.
SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010
Extras menu
3-41
> Configuration > Card Miscellaneous Here it is possible to activate or deactivate different modes of TruTops Mark® behavior. Settings
"Miscellaneous" dialog window
Fig. 3-31
Group field Variable import • •
with existing variable IDs (without selection) or with newly generated variable IDs (with selection).
Group field APL logging In case "Recording APL-calls to" is selected, then all processes in the configured file will be recorded. Group field Mark counter As long as "Reset when accumulated value reached" is selected, the marking counter is set to zero as soon as the counter reaches the final value. Group field Reaction of input control off With this option it is possible to exit not only the TruTops Mark® software but also the operating system when shutting down the control.
3-42
Extras menu
SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010
Group field Time of conversion TruTops Mark® converts marking programs (with the extension 'VLF') automatically into vector files (with the extension 'VCT'). With this option, you can configure when this conversion is to take place. When loading the marking file or when starting the marking > Configuration > Card Options On this dialog window you can enable options and software features. Contact the Trumpf branch office in your country. Settings
"Options" dialog window
Fig. 3-32
Select "Segmentation" This option enables the segmentation of the marking field and the marking of all segments in one marking procedure. Select "Profibus" This option enables the control of the laser marking system via Profibus. Select "QuickFlow" Complex sequential programs which control the entire marking cycle from beginning to end can be generated graphically by using QuickFlow. All interfaces for the laser marking system laser can be controlled using QuickFlow, and data from external sources can be read out. The link to external databanks can be established efficiently.
SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010
Extras menu
3-43
Select "Pilot laser" The pilot laser gives off a red light through the laser optics with a small amount of power. For setup purposes, marking procedures are simulated with the pilot laser before actual markings are made on the workpiece. Select "Marking on the fly" The option "Marking on the fly" offers the possibility of marking moved workpieces (abbreviation = MOF). This option is described in the "Interface description (Marking laser devices with TruTops ® Mark control software)". Select "Multihead" The option Multihead enables a second laser head to be controlled. Select "Focus finder (Z Axis)" With this option, the working distance can be automatically set. This means that after measuring the distance, the Z axis moves to the correct position. At present, there is no description on this option. Select "MatrixGenerator" This option enables matrix definitions, e.g. for semiconductor applications. Select "GridGenerator" This option enables the creation of simple geometric bodies with the aid of a XML file. Select "AutoCalibration" This option enables a compensation of the scanner thermal drif. Select "Navigator" This option enables beginners to carry out marking procedures quickly and simply. Select "LPM" This option enables the laser power measurement. Select "LPC" This option enables the lase power calibration. Select "FastBitmapMarking" This option enables the fast marking of bitmaps.
3-44
Extras menu
SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010
> Configuration > Card User management User management is not activated when the system is supplied. The TruTops Mark® software starts with the user level: "Customer" without requesting a password with all rights of the customer. More detailed information on the settings is given in Chapter 2. Settings
"User management" dialog window
Fig. 3-33
User management can be activated by the customer in the dialog shown above. When user management has been activated, the system reacts as follows: • The additional user level "Operator" is available. The menu functions enabled on the "Operator" level can be configured individually. • On the "Customer" user level the password prompt is active. It cannot be deactivated. • On the "Operator" level the password prompt is active. It can be deactivated. • The default password for "Operator" is: worker • The default password for "Customer" is: customer
SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010
Extras menu
3-45
8.4
> 8 Registry backup
Fig. 3-34
This function can be used to save a backup copy of the registry file of the TruTops Mark® software in the TruTops Mark® backup directory.
8.5
> 9 Delete current VCT files
Fig. 3-35
The currently active VCT files can be deleted with this function. TruTops Mark® converts loaded marking programs (with the extension 'VLF') automatically to vector files (with the extension 'VCT'). If these are no longer required (for example to save space), they can be deleted with this function. Note When the respective file is deleted, any existing variables (such as serial numbers) are reset to their original values.
3-46
Extras menu
SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010
8.6
> 10 Delete all VCT files
Fig. 3-36
This function can be used to delete all VCT files in the VCT directory. In the Section 8.3 "Extras” > "Configuration” > "Directories" the standard directories can be defined also for VCT files. TruTops Mark® saves all the generated VCT files in this directory. Note When the respective file is deleted, any existing variables (such as serial numbers) are reset to their original values.
SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010
Extras menu
3-47
9.
Workstation menu
Workstation menu
9.1
Fig. 3-37
> 1 Referencing
When referencing, the corresponding axis moves to the reference point. At the same time, ensure that the reference point for the Z axis is not the zero point but the largest possible distance to the working area. Referencing can be done for each axis individually or for all active axes together.
9.2
> 2 Configuration
Configuration menu (example)
Fig. 3-38
The menu items given below are only displayed if they are actually available in the sequential or marking mode. Select "Shutter open" The shutter is opened when the workstation is started up. Select "Laser on" The laser is switched on when the workstation is started up.
3-48
Workstation menu
SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010
Select "Reference axis" The axes are automatically referenced when the workstation is started up. This menu item must be selected to enable the positioning of the axis. Select "Use start button" The start button of the workstation is activated or deactivated. Select "Use stop button" The stop button of the workstation is activated or deactivated. Select "Mark without axis positioning" In the marking mode, the laser automatically moves to the entered positions when marking is started. With this option, this behavior can be switched off. Select "Starting automatically after closing door" The workstation starts automatically when the door is closed. Select "Approaching loading position after end of marking" After marking has been completed, the laser moves forwards on the Y axis to the door. Select "Take the axis position by segmentation" If you select a segmented file, segmentation starts at the current position of the workstation. Select "Rotating the A axis to 0 degrees" When using a TruMark Station 5000 (R), the A axis is moved to position 0 after quitting the marking process. Select "Door check with function 'Marking'" The workstation starts the marking automatically when the door is closed. Select "Rotating the A axis to 0 degrees after segmentation" When using a TruMark Station, the A axis is moved to position 0 after segmentation and quitting of the marking process. This does not apply to TruMark Station 5000 (R).
SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010
Workstation menu
3-49
Option A axis on/A axis off The A axis is switched on or off. Select "Position Z axis" When quitting the workstation, the positions of the active axes are saved. If the machine is restarted and the menu item "Reference axis" is selected, the laser automatically moves to the axis positions last saved. Door position The doorway can be carried out in several heights. Group field Station A/B When using a TruMark Station 5000 (R), the offset function enables to correct the marking area in horizontal and vertical direction and in the angle.
10.
Help menu
Help menu
Fig. 3-39
10.1 > 1 TruTops Mark® This function is used to activate the help system of the TruTops Mark® software.
10.2 > 2 Info This function can be used to activate a window which contains information on the version of the TruTops Mark® software.
3-50
Help menu
SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010
11.
Modules
11.1 Control with external data communication TruTops Mark® can be controlled via various interfaces with external data communication. In this case a specific module is shown on the right-hand side of the programming interface. The global (vertically arranged) buttons are then positioned on its righthand edge. Additional, horizontally arranged buttons appear which serve for operation of the displayed module. In the "Modules" menu the modules can be displayed and hidden. The following modules are provided: • Workstation • Digital interface • Profibus • QuickFlow • Serial interface • TCP/IP • COM interface If one of these functions is activated, the status of the respective interface is displayed in the marking interface. A control light appears in the header of the right-hand display area behind the name of the activated interface. This lights up in green when the interface communication is functional. If the interface cannot be addressed, it lights up in red. TLV control
If the module "Serial interface", "Profibus", "TCP/IP" or "COM" is active, the external communication takes place with the TLV protocol (Tag Length Value). The horizontal buttons at the bottom can be used for • creating and deleting monitoring protocols (monitor), • making protocols of TLV control commands in a file (setup), • finding and checking TLV control commands, • configuring, displaying and resetting the settings of the respective interface. You can find information for the TLV control commands in the interface description "TLV commands and interpreter for TruTops Mark® software program".
SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010
Modules
3-51
11.2 Control with workstation The workstation module appears when the marking interface runs on a TruMark Station. The programming interface is extended by one section on the right-hand side, the global (vertically arranged) buttons are then positioned on its right-hand edge. Additional, horizontally arranged buttons appear in the lower section with which the functions of the laser unit can be controlled.
1
4
2
5 3
6.
1 Laser parameters of the marking
4 Display / Entry of the axis positions
file 2 Status of machine components
5 Laser-related buttons
3 Status display
6 Machine and program buttons
Workstation marking program module
3-52
Modules
Fig. 3-40
SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010
11.3 Control with digital interface If the "Digital interface" module is active, the marking interface is controlled via the digital interface, the buttons do not have any function. The status of the input and output signals of the digital interface are displayed in the right-hand display area of the marking interface. The exact specification of communication is contained in the document "Interface description (TruMicro Serie 3000/TruMark Series 3000/5000 marking laser devices with TruTops Mark® control software)".
11.4 QuickFlow control If the "QuickFlow" module is active, the marking interface is controlled with the "QuickFlow" program. In this mode the buttons do not have any functions (also refer to the Section "Tools" > "QuickFlow"). The QuickFlow server interprets the telegrams of QuickFlow, executes the respective commands and generates the corresponding reply telegrams. The exact description of the objects in QuickFlow are contained in the separate documentation "QuickFlow Programming software for generating visual sequential programs".
11.5 Control with serial interface If the "Serial interface" module is active, the marking interface is controlled via the serial interface, the buttons do not have any function. The status of the input and output signals of the serial interface are displayed in the right-hand display area of the marking interface. Further information concerning the "Serial interface" software module is contained in the document "Interface description (TruMicro Serie 3000/TruMark Series 3000/5000 marking laser devices with TruTops Mark® control software)".
SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010
Modules
3-53
11.6 Control with TCP/IP interface If the "TCP/IP interface" module is active, the marking interface is controlled via the TCP/IP interface, the buttons do not have any function. The status of the input and output signals of the TCP/IP interface are displayed in the right-hand display area of the marking interface. Further information concerning the "TCP/IP interface" software module is contained in the document "Interface description (TruMicro Serie 3000/TruMark Series 3000/5000 marking laser devices with TruTops Mark® control software)".
11.7 Control with COM interface If the "COM interface" module is active, the marking interface is controlled via the COM interface, the buttons do not have any function. The status of the input and output signals of the COM interface are displayed in the right-hand display area of the marking interface. Further information concerning the "COM interface" software module is contained in the document "Interface description (TruMicro Serie 3000/TruMark Series 3000/5000 marking laser devices with TruTops Mark® control software)".
3-54
Modules
SW-EN-TTM-03-00 02/2010
Chapter 4
CAD
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
1. 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5
CAD ................................................................................. 4-5 Introduction ...................................................................... 4-5 Marking program.............................................................. 4-6 Starting CAD.................................................................... 4-6 User interface of CAD...................................................... 4-7 User interface of CAD with Multihead............................ 4-13
2. 2.1 2.2
Working with CAD ....................................................... 4-14 Drawing an object .......................................................... 4-14 Change objects.............................................................. 4-17
3. 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9
File menu ...................................................................... 4-22 > New............................................................................. 4-22 > Open ........................................................................... 4-22 > Close........................................................................... 4-23 > Save............................................................................ 4-23 > Print ............................................................................ 4-23 > Print preview ............................................................... 4-24 > Printer setup ............................................................... 4-25 > Print section ................................................................ 4-25 > Send ........................................................................... 4-27
CAD
4-1
4-2
3.10
> Exit.............................................................................. 4-27
4. 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 4.10 4.11 4.12
Edit menu ..................................................................... 4-28 > Undo ........................................................................... 4-28 > Repeat ........................................................................ 4-29 > Cut .............................................................................. 4-29 > Copy ........................................................................... 4-29 > Paste........................................................................... 4-29 > Delete ......................................................................... 4-29 > Modify ......................................................................... 4-30 > Properties ................................................................... 4-42 > Import file .................................................................... 4-45 > Export DXF/DWG ....................................................... 4-48 > Remove double line.................................................... 4-49 > Create polyline............................................................ 4-49
5. 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 5.9
View menu .................................................................... 4-50 > Status bar ................................................................... 4-50 > Tool bars..................................................................... 4-51 > Entire page ................................................................. 4-54 > Entire drawing............................................................. 4-54 > Selection ..................................................................... 4-54 > Last view..................................................................... 4-54 > Named sections .......................................................... 4-55 > Refresh ....................................................................... 4-56 > Only thin lines ............................................................. 4-56
6. 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.7 6.8 6.9 6.10 6.11 6.12 6.13
Draw menu ................................................................... 4-57 > Line ............................................................................. 4-60 > Rectangle.................................................................... 4-64 > Circle........................................................................... 4-66 > Arc of a circle .............................................................. 4-69 > Polyline ....................................................................... 4-73 > Ellipse ......................................................................... 4-76 > Arc of an ellipse .......................................................... 4-77 > Bitmap......................................................................... 4-78 > Dimensioning .............................................................. 4-81 > Hatching...................................................................... 4-83 > Point............................................................................ 4-83 > Tools ........................................................................... 4-84 > Data object.................................................................. 4-88
7. 7.1 7.2 7.3
Laser menu................................................................. 4-105 > Print project............................................................... 4-106 > Export project data as XML file................................. 4-108 > Laser parameters...................................................... 4-108
CAD
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
7.4 7.5 7.6 7.7 7.8 7.9 7.10 7.11 7.12 7.13 7.14 7.15 7.16
> Marking field ............................................................. 4-136 > Sort ........................................................................... 4-148 > Generate object matrix ............................................. 4-151 > Variables................................................................... 4-153 > Hatch styles .............................................................. 4-158 > Font Editor ................................................................ 4-159 > Sort segments........................................................... 4-160 > Project data............................................................... 4-161 > Pilot laser on/off ........................................................ 4-162 > Marking ..................................................................... 4-162 > Navigator .................................................................. 4-163 > Focus test ................................................................. 4-163 > Slow hatch as area ................................................... 4-164
8. 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5
Font Editor.................................................................. 4-165 File menu ..................................................................... 4-168 Edit menu..................................................................... 4-181 View menu ................................................................... 4-182 Font menu.................................................................... 4-187 Help.............................................................................. 4-201
9. 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6 9.7 9.8 9.9
Tools menu................................................................. 4-201 > Layers ....................................................................... 4-202 > Measurement type .................................................... 4-205 > Colors ....................................................................... 4-209 > Grid ........................................................................... 4-210 > Grid active................................................................. 4-212 > Orthogonal mode...................................................... 4-212 > Jump mode ............................................................... 4-213 > Jump to points of intersection................................... 4-213 > Options ..................................................................... 4-214
10.
Window menu ............................................................ 4-230
11. 11.1 11.2
Menu ? (Help) ............................................................. 4-230 > Index ......................................................................... 4-230 > Copyright .................................................................. 4-230
CAD
4-3
4-4
CAD
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
1.
CAD
1.1
Introduction
CAD is the graphic editor of the TruTops Mark® software. With CAD (CAD = Computer Aided Design) you can create drawings which can be marked with the TruTops Mark® software. CAD is a vector-oriented 2-D drawing program program in which you can create a drawing with geometric objects such as lines, rectangles, circles and ellipses or modify existing drawings. In addition it permits the creation of text elements and barcodes as well as the integration of bitmaps. The import function can be used to import external data (e.g. in HPGL, IGES or DXF format). The graphic editor is also used to define the laser parameters and the marking sequence of the individual elements.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
CAD
4-5
1.2
Marking program
Drawings that are generated with the CAD are saved as marking programs. Marking programs are programs which contain the necessary information on the form, sequence and type of marking of a workpiece.
Example of a marking program
1.3
Fig. 4-1
Starting CAD
Press the function key or click the "F10 CAD" button in the start screen of the TruTops Mark® software with the left mouse button to start CAD.
4-6
CAD
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
1.4
User interface of CAD
The user interface of CAD comprises the drawing field (1), the menu bar (2), the tool bar (3), the ruler bars (4) and the status line (5).
1 Drawing field
4 Ruler bar
2 Menu bar
5 Status line
3 Tool bars User interface CAD
Drawing field
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Fig. 4-2
The drawing field shows the area within which the laser can mark. Drawings are created in this area. The size of the drawing field depends on the selected optics (refer to Section 7.4 "Marking field").
CAD
4-7
Menu bar
Menu bar
Fig. 4-3
The pull-down menus can be opened from the menu bar and used to manage work with the CAD. The following menus are provided: •
File
•
Edit
•
View
•
Draw
•
Laser
•
Tools
•
Window
•
(?) Help
These menus are available for accessing all functions of CAD. Some of these functions can also be activated with buttons from the tool bar. The menu functions are activated either with the mouse or with the keyboard. Activation with the mouse
Activation with the keyboard
4-8
•
Click the respective menu in the menu bar. The corresponding pull-down menu opens.
•
Select the respective function in the pull-down menu.
• Press the keys . The corresponding pull-down menu opens. is the key with the character which is underlined in the menu. – Example: File: is key . •
Press the Hotkey of the required function in the pull-down menu or
•
move the marking bar with the arrow keys in the menu to the function and press Enter.
CAD
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Tool bar
The tool bar comprises five functional areas: •
File bar (1)
•
Section bar (2)
•
Jump bar (3)
•
Actions bar (4)
•
Draw bar (5)
1 File bar
5 Draw bar
2 Section bar (zoom function)
6 Laser parameter administration
3 Jump bar
7 Level management
4 Actions bar
8 From left to right (8.1 to 8.8)
8.1 Select ojects with same layer
8.2 Sort
8.3 Define variable
8.4 Navigator
8.5 Focus test
8.6 Show hatch as area
8.7 Pilot laser on/off
8.8 Mark Tool bar
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
CAD
Fig. 4-4
4-9
File tool bar
File bar
Fig. 4-5
Several menu entries from the "File" and "Edit" menus are shown in this area of the tool bar. Section tool bar
Section bar (zoom function)
Fig. 4-6
In this area of the tool bar the functions are displayed as buttons which directly affect the section of the representation: •
Selection
•
Entire page
•
Entire drawing
•
Last view
•
Named section
•
Refresh
•
Only thin lines
Jump tool bar
Jump bar
Fig. 4-7
In this area of the tool bar the functions are displayed as buttons which directly affect the entered coordinates:
4-10
•
Grid
•
Orthogonal mode
•
Jump
•
Points of intersection
CAD
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Actions tool bar
Actions bar
Fig. 4-8
The functions which refer directly to an action are displayed in this area of the tool bar as buttons. The buttons on this tool bar change dynamically with respect to the action. Note The individual areas of the tool bar can be moved to any position on the user interface. To this purpose click the surrounding frame, hold the left mouse button down, pull the bar to the required position and release the mouse button. Note In the menu "View" > "Tool bars" you can show or hide the individual areas of the tool bar. Draw tool bar
Draw bar
Fig. 4-9
Several of the drawing functions of the "Draw" menu are displayed in this area of the tool bar as buttons. • Marking / origin coordinate system
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
•
Line
•
Rectangle
•
Circle
•
Circular arc
•
Polyline
•
Ellipse
•
Elliptical arc
•
Point
•
Variable data object
•
Bitmap
•
Tools
•
Hatching
•
Dimensioning
CAD
4-11
Ruler bars
Ruler bar (section)
Fig. 4-10
The ruler bars to the left and above the drawing field state the reference point and the size of the drawing field. The ruler bars assist you in positioning the drawings in the drawing field and in measuring the size of the drawn objects. These are automatically displayed when the TruTops Mark® CAD is opened. Red lines in the bar show the current position of the mouse pointer. The exact position of the mouse pointer is also shown in the right bottom corner of the Editor as an XY coordinate. Note In the menu "View" > "Tool bars" > "Ruler" you can show or hide the individual areas of the ruler bars. Status line
Status line
Fig. 4-11
The status line comprises three sections:
4-12
•
Information text: A context-related text which describes the next action which is specified or possible.
•
Zoom slide control: The current zoom section can be changed with a zoom slide control; the factor is shown next to the slide control, the factor is displayed to the right of the control slide, it extends from 1 to 1000. If the drawing extends outside the marking field, the factor can be below 1.
•
Coordinate display: Shows the current mouse pointer position as coordinates.
CAD
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
1.5
User interface of CAD with Multihead
The user interface of CAD for the Multihead system consists of a divided drawing field. The white field on the left is assigned to head A. The gray field on the right is assigned to head B.
User interface CAD with Multihead
Drawing field
Fig. 4-12
The white drawing area (master) is supplemented by the display part for the second marking head. The design of the gray field for head B does not allow any objects to be drawn there. This area is only used to display the second marking head. All objects, including those only output with the second marking head, are drawn in the drawing area of the first marking head. Only those objects are displayed in gray in the marking field of head B which are also output with this head. Depending on the configuration, the marking fields may overlap. Head "A" or "B" can makes marks in the overlapping area. Note The maximum overlapping area is specified by the distance between scanner heads A and B and defined in the TruTops Mark configuration. The marking field for the second head is not displayed if this value is 0.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
CAD
4-13
2.
Working with CAD
2.1
Drawing an object
CAD works with geometric objects. These can be used to create more complex structures. Each object contains a number of attributes (level, line type etc.) which affect its appearance. The following example shows how to draw a rectangle as such an object. There are basically two possibilities to draw an object, in this case a rectangle: •
with the "Draw" menu
•
from the "Tool bar"
Draw menu
"Draw" menu
Fig. 4-13
•
In the "Draw" menu select the item "Rectangle". A field appears with a list containing the available construction methods.
•
Select one of the methods by clicking the item, for example "two diagonal points". A check mark appears in front of the active method.
or
4-14
Working with CAD
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Tool bar
•
Click the "Rectangle" button in the "Draw" tool bar.
•
Click the "Rectangle" button in the "Action" tool bar. Two diagonal points".
Note If the mouse pointer is positioned over a button for several seconds, an explanatory text appears. Information on which button it is can be seen in the status line at the bottom left. •
Move the mouse pointer over the drawing field. The mouse pointer changes shape.
•
Click on any point in the drawing field and move the mouse pointer. A rectangle appears.
•
Click the second point. The program creates a rectangle between both diagonal points.
Drawing a rectangle
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Working with CAD
Fig. 4-14
4-15
The diagonal points can also be entered numerically. •
To this purpose activate the construction method as shown above "Rectangle: two diagonal points" either with the "Draw" menu or the "Tool bar".
•
Move the mouse pointer to the "Action" tool bar, which changed when the function was activated.
•
Enter the required X and Y position for the first diagonal point. Click the scroll-down button to open the entry field for the second diagonal point.
•
Enter the required values. When the scroll-down button is clicked again the "Angle" entry field appears.
•
Enter an angle value if the rectangle is not to be positioned parallel to the edges of the drawing area.
•
Confirm your entries by clicking the "OK" button or by pressing .
Note Click the "down arrow" button to open a dialog window in which all entry fields of the function appear. The object is then part of the drawing. It is inactive and must be activated if it has to be changed.
4-16
Working with CAD
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
2.2
Change objects
In the basic position of CAD all objects of the drawing can be selected by clicking (picking) to change them further. When the mouse pointer moves onto an object that can be selected, it changes shape. •
Click with the left mouse button to select the respective object.
It is then surrounded by a dotted frame and can be modified. Select (frame)
If several objects are to be selected, a frame can be drawn over the objects. •
Position the mouse pointer, hold the left mouse button down, pull the frame over the selected objects and release the mouse pointer. All objects which are contained completely within the frame are then selected.
Note When you hold down the key all objects are picked which are even only touched by the frame. Select (accumulate)
Several objects can be selected one after the other •
Moving and copying objects
Hold down the or key and click with the left mouse button on the objects you wish to pick. Every time a new object is selected, the previously selected objects remain active.
Inside the area of selected objects, the mouse pointer changes form and becomes a drag tool. •
Move the mouse pointer into the area of the selected objects, keep the left mouse button pressed and drag the objects into the required position.
Note If the or key is pressed previously, a copy of the object is shifted.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Working with CAD
4-17
Automatic scrolling
If selected objects are to be dragged into a drawing area, which is not visible on the screen, automatic scrolling of the drawing can be initiated. •
Move the mouse pointer to the edge (depending on the required scroll direction to the left, right, up or down) so that the shifting cursor is near the edge of the drawing and scrolling then starts in the respective direction.
Scrolling can also be initiated with the arrow keys. Note If the center button is activated on your mouse driver, it is possible to move the view in a zoom stage by pressing the center button and by moving the viewed area. Modifying objects
Selected objects can be modified in many ways. They can be: • aligned in various ways •
subjected to geometric operations (shifting, rotating, scaling, mirroring)
•
adapted to existing drawing elements by shifting, stretching, flattening or distorting with the "Adjust" function.
•
automatically generated several times with grid or circular duplication
•
archived as icons in a library.
These modifications are normally possible in different ways:
4-18
•
From the "Edit" menu (details in Section 4 "Edit menu")
•
From the "Action" menu (details in Section 1.4 "User interface of CAD" > "Tool bar" and "Draw object tool bar")
•
From the context menu.
Working with CAD
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Context menu
If one or more objects have been picked, the context menu can be opened which contains the main editing functions. •
Move the mouse pointer into the area of the selected object(s).
•
Click the right mouse button. The context menu appears.
Context menu
Fig. 4-15
The following actions can be performed in the context menu: > Activate Activates the transforming mode. This function can be used to modify the shape of objects, depending on their type, in various ways.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Working with CAD
4-19
> Modify Opens a list containing all modification options of the "Edit" menu such as alignment, shifting, rotating, scaling etc. Details on these functions are contained in the Section "Edit menu" > "Modify". > Delete The selceted object(s) will be deleted. Note Marked objects can also be deleted by pressing the key. > Properties Depending on the object type a properties window is opened in which the various settings can be made. Details are contained in Section 4.8 "Properties". > Group The picked objects are combined to a block. This block is automatically given a specific name which can be found in the "Properties" window (see above). > Select subset A subset of the picked objects can be selected. This can for example be important if two lines are on top of one another and it is not otherwise possible to specify which line is meant. > Upwards Currently not available. > Downwards Currently not available. > Dissolve A block object has been picked. With the "Dissolve" function it is broken up into its individual elements. These individual elements can then also be picked. This also applies if hatching or a dimension has been selected. > Fill out Picked objects can be filled out with this function. Details are contained in the Sections "Laser menu" and "Extras menu > "Hatch styles".
4-20
Working with CAD
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
During the step > Marking laser light is emitted from the lens. WARNING
Laser light can burn your skin and cause permanent damage to your eyes. ¾
If the laser protection cover is either open or missing, wear laser protection goggles with glasses which are suitable for the wavelength of the laser light.
¾
Never put your hand between the lens and the workpiece.
¾
Never look into the lens.
> Marking Initiates a quick output of the existing drawing to the marking device for test purposes. If no object has been selected in the drawing, the entire drawing is marked. If objects have been selected, only these are output.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Working with CAD
4-21
3.
File menu
The "File" menu contains commands for file handling.
File menu
3.1
Fig. 4-16
> New
This function creates a new marking program. "CAD – [LaserCAD1]" appears in the title of the user interface. The size of the marking field depends on the presetting in the menu "Laser" > "Marking field" > "Optic". The window of an already open drawing is placed in the background.
3.2
> Open
This function is used to open an existing marking program. A dialog window opens from which the required file can be selected.
4-22
File menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
3.3
> Close
This function closes the active drawing. If it has not been saved, a prompt appears asking whether you would like to do so. •
Click "Yes" to save the drawing.
•
In the dialog window select "Save as" to enter the place where you wish to save the file, enter a name and then click the "Save" button to complete the procedure.
If this file which has been modified has already been saved, a prompt appears asking whether the changes should be saved. ¾ Click "Yes" to save the drawing.
3.4
> Save
This function saves the changes in the current marking program. If the program has not yet been saved, a dialog window "Save as" appears automatically. •
Select the respective place you wish to save the file, enter a name and then click the "Save" button to complete the procedure.
3.5
> Print
The program can be printed out on a connected printer for documentation purposes. Click this button to open the print dialog of your printer. If the printable area is smaller than the drawing size, the print-out is spread over several pages (from left to right, from top to bottom). These pages contain the entire drawing when put together.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
File menu
4-23
3.6
> Print preview
With the "Print preview" function you can see how the drawing will be output on the printer. When "Print preview" is selected, a window opens in which the section can be zoomed. If this is output on several printed pages you can scroll through the individual pages. It is also possible to print directly from the print preview. •
Click the "Close" button to close the print preview.
Print preview
4-24
File menu
Fig. 4-17
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
3.7
> Printer setup
With this function you return to the setup dialog of a printer on which the printout is to be made. The user has the possibility to select a printer previously installed under Windows and to make settings such as the paper format and printing direction.
3.8
> Print section
This function opens a print dialog which features several options for printing the open drawing. Print section
"Print section" dialog window
Fig. 4-18
Option Entire drawing, format filling The drawing (not the drawing field) is printed as large as possible onto the paper format provided. The necessary scale is displayed under Scale 1:xxx.
Option Current picture section, format filling The set picture section is printed so that the format is filled. The page aspect ratio is adapted so that none of the details of the picture section is omitted. The printed area is therefore larger than shown on the screen. The selection "Current picture section, format filling" refers to the section shown in the dialog for section "Print". At the beginning this section is identical with the current view of the drawing. After a zoom action within the dialog, however, the section shown in the dialog changes.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
File menu
4-25
Option Fixed scale This function permits the entry of a fixed scale. A frame appears on the drawing in the representation window which symbolizes the paper size. This frame can be clicked and moved as required on the drawing in order to print any section of the drawing in the set scale. Paper size Shows the currently set paper size in the menu "Printer" > "Printer setup" on which the views and scale calculations in this dialog are based. Button Printer setup Opens the print dialog in which the printer settings can be made. Number Permits the entry of the number of copies to be printed. Button Overview The entire drawing is shown in the representation window. The print section shown in the rectangle can be moved on the drawing within this picked rectangle as required. Button Paper The active paper area is displayed. The paper area shown in the rectangle can be moved on the drawing within this picked rectangle as required while holding down the mouse button. Button Zoom Any section of the drawing can be selected for display by pulling a rectangle while holding down the mouse button. The print area can then be moved anywhere on the drawing while holding the mouse button down within the picked frame. Button Print Starts printing. Button Cancel Closes the dialog box without starting the printing job.
4-26
File menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
3.9
> Send
This function accesses the Windows mail system.
3.10 > Exit Concludes work with the CAD program. If the current drawing has been changed, a prompt appears asking whether the changes in the file should be saved.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
File menu
4-27
4.
Edit menu
Edit menu
Fig. 4-19
In addition to familiar functions such as "Undo", "Restore", "Copy" etc. this menu contains further functions with which you can modify drawing elements. Import and export functions for files with other data formats can be used.
4.1
> Undo
Undoes the last change in the drawing. The last ten actions can be undone in succession.
4-28
Edit menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
4.2
> Repeat
Permits restoration of the previous condition if the last change(s) have been undone. The last undone ten actions can be restored in succession.
4.3
> Cut
The selected objects of the drawings are deleted from the drawing (cut out) and pasted to the clipboard. They are contained on the clipboard in CAD format. Parts of the drawing can therefore be transferred to another drawing or another program.
4.4
> Copy
The selected objects are copied and transferred to the clipboard. They are contained on the clipboard in CAD format. Parts of the drawing can therefore be transferred to another drawing or another program.
4.5
> Paste
The content of the clipboard is pasted to the drawing if it is contained there in CAD format or as a bitmap. In this way parts of the drawing of other CAD drawings or other programs can be pasted into an existing drawing. Note Objects in CAD format are inserted without enquiry in accordance with their global coordinates. If the source document has a different paper size, the pasted objects could possibly be located outside or exceed the page of the target document.
4.6
> Delete
The selected objects of the drawing are deleted from the drawin.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Edit menu
4-29
4.7
> Modify
> Left-justified This function moves selected objects horizontally so that all lefthand limits of the objects align with the left-hand limits of the object which was last selected. > Centered horizontal This function moves selected objects horizontally so that all center lines of the objects are aligned with the center line of the object which was last selected. > Right-justified This function moves selected objects horizontally so that all righthand limits of the objects align with the right-hand limits of the object which was last selected. > Top justified This function moves selected objects vertically so that all top limits of the objects align with the top limits of the object which was last selected. > Centered vertical This function moves selected objects vertically so that all vertical center lines of the objects are aligned with the vertical center line of the object which was last selected. > Bottom justified This function moves selected objects vertically so that all bottom limits of the objects align with the bottom limits of the object which was last selected. > Horizontally centered This function moves selected objects horizontally so that the righthand and left-hand distance of all objects to the edge of the page is the same. > Vertically centered This function moves selected objects vertically so that the top and bottom distance of all objects to the edge of the page is the same.
4-30
Edit menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
> Equal vertical distance This function moves three or more selected objects vertically so that the vertical distance between the objects is the same. > Equal horizontal distance This function moves three or more selected objects horizontally so that the horizontal distance between the objects is the same. > Equal width This function changes the width of the selected objects so that the width of the objects aligns with the width of the object which was last selected. > Equal height This function changes the height of the selected objects so that the height of the objects aligns with the height of the object which was last selected. > Shift This function can be used to shift objects after entering a start and target position in the drawing field. •
To this purpose click a starting point in the drawing field with the mouse button after selecting the function.
•
Move the mouse pointer to the required target point. A dotted line appears with an arrow at the end.
•
Click the target point with the mouse button. The selected objects are shifted to the target point.
The offset can also be entered in the "Action" tool bar, which changes when this function is activated.
"Action" offset tool bar
•
Fig. 4-20
Enter the required X and Y offset values into both fields next to "Offset". The shift is initiated by clicking the red OK button or by pressing the key.
Note When the start and target points are given, the respective set jump characteristics are taken into account.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Edit menu
4-31
> Rotate Selected objects can be rotated as required with this function. •
After selecting the function first enter a fixed point by clicking with the mouse button around which rotation should be performed.
•
Move the mouse pointer away from the fixed point. A dotted circle appears.
•
Click again to enter a start point and an end point for rotation. The selected objects are rotated.
The fixed point and the rotation angle can also be entered in the "Action" tool bar, which changes when this function is activated. Only the input boxes for "Reference" appear in the tool bar When the scroll-down button is clicked, the "Angle" entry field appears. You can also click the "down arrow" button to open a dialog window in which both fields appear.
"Action" fixed point/angle tool bar
Fig. 4-21
•
Enter the required X and Y values of the fixed point into both fields next to "Fixed point".
•
Enter the required angle. You can also specify whether a copy of the selected elements is to be created and rotated, or the originals themselves.
Rotation is initiated by clicking the red OK button.
4-32
Edit menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
> Scaling Selected objects can be scaled as required with this function. •
After selecting the function first enter a fixed point by clicking with the mouse button around which scaling should be performed.
•
Move the mouse pointer away from the fixed point. A dotted rectangle appears.
•
Click again to enter a start point and an end point for scaling. The selected objects are scaled.
The fixed point and the degree of scaling can also be entered in the "Action" tool bar, which changes when this function is activated. Only the input boxes for "Fixed point" appear in the tool bar. By clicking on the scroll down button, further input boxes appear. You can also click the "down arrow" button to open a dialog window in which both fields appear.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Edit menu
4-33
Scale marked objects
"Scale marked objects" dialog field
Fig. 4-22
•
Enter the required X and Y values of the fixed point into both fields next to "Fixed point".
•
Enter the required scale factor. You can also specify whether a copy of the selected elements is to be created and scaled, or the originals themselves.
or •
You enter the width and height in the respective boxes.
Scaling is initiated by clicking the red OK button.
4-34
Edit menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
> Mirroring Selected objects can be mirrored with this function. When this function is activated, the selected objects are first horizontally mirrored on an axis through their geometric center point. If the mouse pointer is moved on any line of the objects, this is regarded as a mirror axis. •
In the "Action" tool bar check the box "Copy" if you wish to mirror a copy of the selected objects.
Mirroring tool bar
Fig. 4-23
Mirroring is initiated by clicking with the left-hand mouse button, pressing "Enter" or by clicking the "OK" button in the "Action" tool bar.
Mirrored rectangle
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Edit menu
Fig. 4-24
4-35
> Adjust This function can be used to adjust marked objects to up to three pairs of points. •
After selecting the function first enter the first point by clicking with the mouse button from which adjustment should be performed.
•
Move the mouse pointer away from the point. A line appears with an arrow at the tip.
•
Enter the first target point by clicking again.
•
Repeat a second and third time if necessary. Click "OK" with the mouse button or press Enter to initiate adjustment.
The start points and fixed points can also be entered in the "Action" tool bar, which changes when this function is activated. Only the entry fields for the first start point are visible in the tool bar. When the scroll-down button is clicked the "1st Target point" entry field appears. You can also click the "down arrow" button to open a dialog window in which all fields appear.
4-36
Edit menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Adjust marked objects
"Adjust marked objects" dialog field
Fig. 4-25
•
Enter the required X and Y values of the first start point into both fields next to "1st Start point".
•
Enter the required X and Y values of the first target point into both fields next to "1st Target point".
•
Repeat these entries – if required – for the second and third target point. You can also specify whether a copy of the selected elements are to be adjusted, or the originals themselves. Adjustment is initiated by clicking the red OK button or by pressing the Enter key.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Edit menu
4-37
> Copy grid-like This function is used to copy marked objects either linearly next to one another or in a grid-like manner next to and above one another. When the function has been selected, a dialog window opens in which the currently set copy pattern is displayed. The selected objects are displayed with a gray background. The required settings can be performed in this dialog window. Reproduce (matrix)
"Reproduce (grid-like)" dialog window
Fig. 4-26
Select "Represent drawing" When this check box has been checked, the surrounding, nonselected drawing is also displayed alongside the grid pattern of the currently marked objects. Button Overview When this button has been activated not only the current section but the entire drawing is displayed. Option Chessboard-like Reproduction is performed in a chessboard manner, in both horizontal and vertical directions.
4-38
Edit menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Option Linear Reproduction is performed linearly, i.e. only in one direction. Angle of rotation An angle of rotation for the arrangement of the reproduced objects can be entered. Horizontal distance The horizontal distances of the individual grid elements are selected so that they can be arranged next to one another without spacing. If the value here is lowered, overlapping occurs, if it is increased, larger spaces result. Vertical distance The vertical distances of the individual grid elements are selected so that they can be arranged next to one another without spacing. If the value here is lowered, overlapping occurs, if it is increased, larger spaces result. Number horizontal The number of grid elements in a horizontal direction. The result of the current setting is displayed in the window. Another reference element can be selected by clicking an object in the representation window. Number vertical The number of grid elements in a vertical direction. The result of the current setting is displayed in the window. Another reference element can be selected by clicking an object in the representation window. Click "OK" or press the Enter key to start reproduction. Click "Cancel" or press the key to terminate the process.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Edit menu
4-39
> Copy circularly Marked objects can be copied circularly with this function. When the function has been selected, a dialog window opens in which the currently set reproduction pattern can be displayed. The selected objects are displayed with a gray background. The required settings can be performed in this dialog window. Reproduce (circularly)
"Reproduce (circularly)" dialog window
Fig. 4-27
Select "Rotate objects" When this check box has been checked, the marked objects are rotated by an entered angle for circular reproduction. Center Entry of the center point for circular reproduction. Alternatively the center point can also be defined by clicking the mouse in the window.
4-40
Edit menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Number Entry of the number of copies of the marked objects. These are regularly arranged around the set center point. Option Full circle If the option field "Full circle" is selected, the marked objects can be reproduced in a full circle. Option Angle step If the "Angle step" option is selected and the ckeck box "Rotate objects" is checked, the objects are rotated by the entered angle. Select "Represent drawing" When this box has been checked, the surrounding, non-selected drawing is also displayed as well as the grid pattern of the currently marked objects. Button Overview When this button has been activated, not only the current section but the entire drawing is displayed. Click "OK" or press the Enter key to start reproduction. Click "Cancel" or press the key to terminate the process.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Edit menu
4-41
4.8
> Properties
This function shows the properties of marked objects. When this function is activated, a dialog window opens in which the various properties of the marked objects are displayed and can be modified. Card Rectangle Modify properties
"Modify rectangle properties" dialog window
Fig. 4-28
Depending on the type of the marked object(s), properties such as start and end points, length, width, height etc. can be modified. Card Layer
"Properties - Layer" dialog window
Fig. 4-29
Each object is on a defined level. With this mechanism drawing elements (dimensions, auxiliary lines, lettering etc.) can be shown and hidden which ensures enhanced clarity.
4-42
Edit menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
The layers are managed on the basis of their names. The list field shows the currently available layers. A layer is selected by clicking a name. Background and CenterLines have the same name in all languages. Button New When this function is activated, a dialog window opens in which a new layer can be created. Define new layer
"Define new layer" dialog window
Fig. 4-30
Details on the definition and for properties of layers are given in the Section "Extras menu" > "Layers".
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Edit menu
4-43
Card Laser Here, the marked object can be assigned the appropriate laser parameters.
"Properties - Laser" dialog window
Fig. 4-31
Details on the laser parameters can be found in Section 7.3 "Laser parameter".
4-44
Edit menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
4.9
> Import file
This function is used to import files in the formats 'HPGL', 'IGES', 'DXF/DWG', 'PCR' and 'VLF'.
Edit menu
Fig. 4-32
When this function has been activated, a dialog window appears in which the required files can be found, selected and imported. Note AutoCAD DXF files: *.DWG can be imported up to the 2006 or any former AutoCAD version.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Edit menu
4-45
Import HPGL file
Edit menu – Import HPGL file
Fig. 4-33
The file is converted into CAD format and the geometric order (Quadtree) is calculated to permit fast access to the individual objects. A dialog window appears in which the scale and the allocation are entered.
4-46
Edit menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Import scale allocation
"Import scale allocation" dialog window
Fig. 4-34
Scale Entry of the required scale. The exact scale which depicts the file to be imported with format filling on the drawing area is given in the field behind "(optimum: xxx:yyy)". Horizontal position The imported file is pasted into the drawing area with either leftjustified, horizontal central or right-justified positioning or by entering the absolute position in the drawing area; the absolute position permits entry of an offset (refer to "Absolute position").
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Edit menu
4-47
Vertical position The imported file is pasted into the drawing area flush with either the bottom edge, vertical centered, or by entering the absolute position in the drawing area; the absolute position permits entry of an offset (refer to "Absolute position"). Absolute position The imported file is pasted into the drawing area with the absolute X or Y coordinates of this file with the offset defined in this field. Laser parameter allocation Here the line types of the file to be imported (left-hand list) and the defined laser parameters of the project (right-hand list) are allocated. Details on laser parameters are contained in the Section "Laser menu" > "Laser parameters". Font assignment Here the character sets of the file to be imported (left-hand list) and the defined character sets of the project (right-hand list) are allocated. Details on character sets are contained in the Section "Laser menu" > "Font Editor". Vector minimum length In order to prevent division into too many vectors with very short lengths, a minimum length can be set; shorter vectors are combined to this minimum length. Select "Close automatic" All non-linked lines of the imported file are closed.
4.10 > Export DXF/DWG CAD files: *.dxf (Drawing Interchange Format) or AutoCAD DXF files: *.dwg can be exported with "Menu > Edit > Export DXF/DWG file".
4-48
Edit menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
4.11 > Remove double line If you find on closer inspection that a line consists of a double line, you can remove it. Mark the double line and select "Menu > Edit > Remove double line". The following dialog window opens:
View menu
Fig. 4-35
Confirm with OK. Now there will only be one line.
4.12 > Create polyline If, for example, you have created a rectangle which consists of 4 single lines, the 4 single lines can be changed into a polyline by encompassing the lines with a frame and trigger the function with "Menu > Edit > Create polyline". The 4 single lines are now combined in a polyline and the color of the line changes to red.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Edit menu
4-49
5.
View menu
View menu
Fig. 4-36
With the "View" menu the user interface of CAD can be customized.
5.1
> Status bar
Here it can be selected whether the status bar is displayed at the bottom of the screen or not (details are contained in Section 1.4, User interface of CAD).
Status bar
4-50
View menu
Fig. 4-37
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
5.2
> Tool bars
The tool bars serve for fast access to important functions of CAD. They can be activated or deactivated here. Note Activated functions are indicated by a checkmark. Tool bars can be moved by clicking the surrounding frame and pulling it to any required location. If a tool bar is moved to the edge of the drawing area, its orientation (horizontal/vertical) can change and it can take up position at the edge of the drawing area. > File Shows the menu items from the "File", "Edit" and "Help" as a tool bar.
File tool bar
Fig. 4-38
> Jump Shows the functions which directly influence the coordinate entry (grid, orthogonal mode, jump, jump/intersection points) as a tool bar.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Jump tool bar
Fig. 4-39
View menu
4-51
> Actions Shows the functions which refer directly to actions (e.g. alignment, shifting, duplication of objects) as a tool bar. Note This tool bar changes dynamically depending on the action.
1 Construction types 2 Entry field "Action" tool bar
3 Input control 4 Construction control Fig. 4-40
This tool bar also permits exact numeric entries during the creation of objects. It is therefore advisable to always switch this tool bar on. Details on this can be found in Section 1.4 "User interface of CAD " > "Tool bar" and 2.1 "Draw object, Tool bar". Construction types
Displays the different construction options of an object, depending on the object type. For example if a line has to be drawn, the construction options "two points, point, length, angle, tangent from point to circle" etc. can be selected. When another object type is selected, this tool bar area changes in accordance with the construction options of the new object type.
Entry field
4-52
Permits entry of the individual features (start point, length, angle). The entry field switches over accordingly.
View menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Input control
Controls the entry of the construction features. The small arrow keys can be used to switch between the different entry fields (e.g. start point or length/angle). The large arrow opens a new window in which all features of the respective construction are listed at the same time. Note This window can be shifted as required and remains as a basic setting for further construction.
Construction control
Permits switchover between various construction types. Note Switchover is also possible with the -/ keys. Construction is also concluded by clicking the button with the red checkmark. > Section Shows the functions which directly affect the view section ("Selection", "Entire page", "Entire drawing", "Last view", "Named sections", "Refresh", "Only thin lines") as a tool bar.
Section tool bar
Fig. 4-41
> Ruler A ruler appears to the left and above the drawing area which takes the reference point and the scale of the drawing into account. The mouse pointer position is marked with colored lines on the ruler. The marks on the ruler have been selected so that the divisions are easily legible.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
View menu
4-53
5.3
> Entire page
Displays the entire page in the defined marking field size. The area outside the defined marking field size is shown in another color.
5.4
> Entire drawing
Full screen display of the entire drawing.
5.5
> Selection
When this function is activated, a drawing area can be opened with the mouse pointer with full-screen display.
5.6
> Last view
Shows the last selected zoom section. If, for example, you have enlarged a section to view a detail, you can return to the higher-level display with this function.
4-54
View menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
5.7
> Named sections
Permits the naming of zoomed sections which can then be opened by their name (further information by clicking the respective field). > Named sections
"Named sections" dialog window
Fig. 4-42
Representation window Represents the named sections. In the "Designation" field you can enter the name for the new section or change it by clicking the existing name. The displayed coordinates (under "from left", "from right", "from top", "from bottom") are the limitations of the respective section. Button Create tiles Divides the entire drawing area into equal sections (tiles). You can select the horizontal and vertical number and the designation; with "Create tiles" the named zoomed sections are then automatically created and entered into the list.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
View menu
4-55
Button Represent The section currently selected in the representation window is shown. Button Close Closes the dialog window. Button Current section Enters the currently selected zoom section into the list of the representation window. You have to enter a name. Button Remove Removes the section selected in the representation window from the list.
5.8
> Refresh
Refreshes the current section of the drawing area. During intensive drawing, gaps and small pixel errors can occur in the screen representation. When this function has been activated, the section can be newly represented without faults.
5.9
> Only thin lines
Shows all lines of the drawn object independently of the definition of the line thickness (this corresponds to the set width in the "Laser parameters" menu, refer to Section 7.3 "Laser parameters" > "Main parameters") in the same thickness. During zooming correctly scaled representation of lines of varying thickness can cause confused representations. In addition thick lines increase the image creation time.
4-56
View menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
6.
Draw menu
The "Draw" menu contains all construction type with which you can create objects. When the object type (e.g. line) has been selected, the construction type (e.g. as tangent, two points) is defined.
Draw menu
Fig. 4-43
Note Several functions in the "Draw" menu can also be activated, with the "Draw" tool bar by clicking the respective button.
Draw tool bar
Fig. 4-44
When the construction type has been selected, the required features of construction are interactively entered, for example first a coordinate (start point), then the length of the line and then the angle. There are two possible options for entering construction features:
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
•
with the mouse pointer in the drawing field,
•
from the keyboard by entry in the respective entry fields of the corresponding tool bar. Here a dialog window can also be switched on which contains all features as input fields.
Draw menu
4-57
Construction features
All constructions require the following feature entries: •
Coordinates (points)
•
Scale sizes (length, width, height, distance)
•
Angles
•
Other drawing objects (for tangents, center vertical, parallels)
The construction is concluded by one of the following actions: •
Click the mouse button
•
Press the key
•
Click the red OK button in the "Action" tool bar
The CAD permits fast creation of identical objects in the form of rectangles, circles and ellipses. When an object has been created on the draw area, the features of this object have been saved and pre-defined for the next object. A copy of the object which was last drawn appears by clicking the right mouse button. This procedure can be repeated as often as possible as long as the key is not pressed or another object selected. This function can also be switched off, refer to Section 10.9 "Extras menu"> "Options" > "Draw".
Enter coordinates During the construction of new objects of the drawing, coordinates (points) are often required. These can be entered in various ways: Free entry
The point is determined with the mouse pointer. The coordinates are displayed in the "Action" and "Status" tool bar.
Jumping of points
The "Jump" function is activated. When the mouse pointer comes near a point of the drawing, it changes its form. The exact point of the drawing can be accepted by clicking.
Jumping intersection points
The "Jump intersection points" function is activated. When the mouse pointer comes near the intersection point of two objects, it changes its form. The exact intersection point of the drawing can be accepted by clicking.
Keyboard input
The coordinates can be numerically entered into the respective entry field of the corresponding tool bar. Here a dialog window can also be switched on which contains all features as input fields. Enter length During the construction of new objects of the drawing, scales (length, width, height, distance) are often required. These can be generated in various ways:
4-58
Draw menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Free entry
The length is calculated from the distance of the current mouse pointer position and the respective logical reference point for the length. This is displayed in the "Action" tool bar.
Jumping of points
The "Jump" function is activated. When the mouse pointer comes near a point of the drawing, it changes its form. The exact point of the drawing as a start point for the length can be accepted by clicking. If another point of the drawing is approached and jumped, a length can be taken exactly from the drawing. If the length of a drawn object is required during construction, its property can be accepted by approaching this object and clicking with the right-hand mouse button. First a selection menu opens from which the concrete length can be selected.
Prerequisite
Control of the right mouse button must be set in the dialog window "Extras" > "Options" > "Draw" on the context menu for length, angle.
Keyboard input
The length can be numerically entered into the respective entry field of the corresponding tool bar. Here a dialog window can also be switched on which contains all features as input fields. Entered lengths are saved as a presetting and are offered for selection the next time a length is entered. Entering an angle During the construction of new objects of the drawing, angles are often required. These can be generated in various ways.
Free entry
The angle is calculated from the connecting line between the current mouse pointer position and the respective logical reference point. It is displayed in the "Action" tool bar.
Jumping of points
If the angle of a drawn object is required during construction, its properties can be accepted by clicking with the right-hand mouse button on this object. First a selection menu opens from which the concrete angle can be selected.
Prerequisite
Control of the right mouse button must be set in the dialog window "Extras" > "Options" > "Draw" on the context menu for length, angle.
Keyboard input
The angle can be numerically entered into the respective entry field of the corresponding tool bar. Here a dialog window can also be switched on which contains all features as input fields.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Draw menu
4-59
6.1
> Line
When the "Line" submenu has been selected from the "Draw" menu, various options are available for drawing a line. The "Action" tool bar changes correspondingly.
Line action bar
Fig. 4-45
> Two points A line is created by clicking on a start and end point. The coordinates of the points can also be directly entered into the dialog window of the "Action" tool bar. > Point, length, angle This function requires the entry of a start point, the line length and of the angle to the horizontal to define a line specifically. Click a start point. The form of the mouse pointer changes to a length symbol. Determine the length by pulling and clicking. The form of the mouse pointer changes to an angle symbol. Define the angle to the horizontal by pulling and clicking. Positive angles are given in a clockwise direction.
Line, point, length, angle information
4-60
Draw menu
Fig. 4-46
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
> Point as tangent When the point has been entered, approach a circle or arc. The required line appears. As there are two options, it is possible to move between these with the / keys or the button of the "Action" tool bar. > Tangent This function draws a tangent between two circles or arcs. Select the first circle or arc and then approach the second. With the / keys or the button of the "Action" tool bar select one of the four tangent versions. Select the required version by clicking. > Tangent with angle This function draws a tangent from a circle or arc with a defined length and a defined horizontal angle. First select the circle to which a tangent is to be created. Then determine the length and the angle. > Mid-perpendicular This function is used to create a center vertical to a previously selected line. Approach a line and select by clicking, the center vertical appears – then determine the length. As there are two options, it is possible to move between these with the / keys or the button of the "Action" tool bar. > Bisecting line Creates a line as a bisecting line between two lines of the drawing. To this purpose two lines are approached in succession. The required bisecting line appears – the length is then determined. As there are four options, it is possible to move between these with the / keys or the button of the "Action" tool bar.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Draw menu
4-61
> Parallel Creates a line as a parallel to a line of the drawing at a certain distance. To this purpose approach a line. The required parallel appears. Now determine the distance from this line. As there are two options, it is possible to move between these with the / keys or the button of the "Action" tool bar. > Parallel by point Creates a parallel to a line the distance of which is determined by a point which is to intersect the parallel. To this purpose approach a line. The required parallel appears. Now select the point which the parallel should intersect.
Parallel with point
4-62
Draw menu
Fig. 4-47
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
> Perpendicular This function creates a perpendicular to an object. Select the freely selectable start point of the line. Now select an object to which the perpendicular is to be created. Both a circle (arc) or a line can be selected as an object.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Perpendicular
Fig. 4-48
Draw menu
4-63
6.2
> Rectangle
After selecting the "Rectangle" submenu in the "Draw" menu, there are three different options for drawing rectangles. The "Action" tool bar changes correspondingly.
Rectangle action bar
Fig. 4-49
> Point, width, height, angle This function creates a rectangle by entering a corner point, the width and height of the rectangle and the angle to the start point. The following illustration lists the four parameters and their sequence.
3
2
4
1
1 Point 2 Width Rectangle: Point, width, height, angle
4-64
Draw menu
3 Height 4 Angle Fig. 4-50
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
> 1st point, 2nd point, height This functions generates a rectangle by entering the two corner points of the basic line and the required height. The angle to the horizontal is determined by both first points.
3
2
1 Rectangle 1. point, 2. point, 3. height
Fig. 4-51
> Two diagonal points This function creates a rectangle by entering two diagonal points.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Draw menu
4-65
6.3
> Circle
After selecting the "Circle" submenu in the "Draw" menu there are various different options for drawing circles. The "Action" tool bar changes correspondingly.
Circle action bar
Fig. 4-52
> Center point and radius The simplest method of drawing circles is to determine the center point and the radius. After selecting a point the radius can be determined. This is performed either interactively by pulling the mouse or by direct entry of the radius value in the "Radius" field in the "Action" tool bar.
4-66
Draw menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
> 2 points on the circle With this function a circle can be drawn by defining two diagonal points. Select the first point or its coordinates; then repeat for the second point. The coordinates of the second point can also be entered relatively to the first point. To this purpose the "relative" box must be selected in the "Action" tool bar. As shown in the following diagram, this function can be used, for example, to place a circle around a set square. To this purpose two opposing corner points of the rectangle are used as an entry for determining the circle.
Circle, two points on the circle
Fig. 4-53
> Center and circle point This function creates a circle from the center point and a point on the circle. Similarly as for drawing a circle with the entry of the center point and the radius, the center point is required in this case. The radius is, however, not entered directly, but it can serve, for example, as an intersection point of two objects as a circle point.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Draw menu
4-67
> From 3 points This function creates a circle by entering three points.
Circle, from three points
Fig. 4-54
> On 3 tangents This function creates a circle which touches the three objects of the drawing at a tangent. These can be lines, circles or arcs.
Circle, on three tangents
Fig. 4-55
As there are several possible options for construction, it is possible to move between these with the / keys or the button of the "Action" tool bar. > On 2 tangents and radius This function creates a circle which touches the two objects of the drawing at a tangent and which has a defined radius. > Point, tangent, radius This function is used for creating a circle which touches another object at a tangent. First the object to be touched must be selected, the touching point determined and finally the radius stated.
4-68
Draw menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
6.4
> Arc of a circle
After selecting the "Arc of a circle" submenu in the "Draw" menu there are various different options for drawing circle arcs. The "Action" tool bar changes correspondingly.
Arc of a circle action bar
Fig. 4-56
> Center and radius With this function an arc of a circle is created by the entry of the center point (1), radius (2), start and end angle (3).
Arc of a circle: 1 Center point, 2 Radius, 3 Angle
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Draw menu
Fig. 4-57
4-69
> From 2 points and a radius With this function an arc of a circle is created by the entry of two end points (1, 2) and the radius (3).
2 3
1
Arc of a circle: From two points and a radius
Fig. 4-58
> Center, circle and angel point This function is used to create an arc from the center point (1) and two points on the arc of the circle. The second point (2) determines the radius and the start angle of the arc. The connecting line of the third point (3) with the center point defines the end angle.
Arc of a circle: 1 Center point, 1 Circle, 3 Angle point
4-70
Draw menu
Fig. 4-59
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
> From 3 points This function is used to create an arc of a circle from three points on the arc. The first point (1) defines the start point of the circular arc; the third point (3) defines its end point. The second point (2) lies on the circle line.
Arc of a circle: From three points
Fig. 4-60
> On 3 tangents This function is used to create an arc of a circle which touches three objects of the drawing at a tangent. These can be lines, circles or arcs. The tangential point of the first object (1) defines the start point, the tangential point of the third object (3) the end point of the arc. As there are several construction options, it is possible to move between these with the / keys or the button of the "Action" tool bar.
Arc of a circle: On three tangents
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Draw menu
Fig. 4-61
4-71
> On 2 tangents and radius This function creates an arc of a circle which touches the two objects (1, 2) of the drawing at a tangent and which has a defined radius (3). The objects to be touched can be lines, circles or arcs. As there are several construction options, it is possible to move between these with the / keys or the button of the "Action" tool bar.
Arc of a circle: On two tangents and radius
4-72
Draw menu
Fig. 4-62
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
6.5
> Polyline
After selecting the "Polyline" submenu in the "Draw" menu a polyline can be drawn. The "Action" tool bar changes correspondingly. A polyline is comprised of several individual lines or arcs of a circle. The start point is defined by clicking the left mouse button. Additional points are added in the same manner. The end point is determined by clicking the right mouse button or by pressing . The "Polyline" dialog window of the "Action" tool bar features various options for creating a polyline.
Press the arrow icon. The following "Construct Polyline" dialog window opens: Construct polyline
"Construct Polyline" dialog field
Fig. 4-63
Select "Closed" Automatically links start and end point of the polyline. Select "B-spline" Displays the polyline as a B-spline. A B-spline is a curve in a wedge determined by two construction lines. The spline is calculated so that it touches the connection line between two neighboring points in the center at a tangent.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Draw menu
4-73
Select "Through the points" The spline runs through internally calculated support points so that it intersects with the given points. Select "Start angle" The open spline through the points can start with a fixed start angle to ensure tangential adjustment to another element. Select "End angle" The open spline through the points can end with a fixed angle to ensure tangential adjustment to another element. Dissolve
A polyline with spline can be dissolved into lines in the context menu of the element. The accuracy of the dynamic dissolution can be set under "Tools" > "Options" > "Object" > "Polyline". The value given here states by which maximum quantity of the drawing unit the dissolved lines deviates from the original spline.
Modify polyline
A polyline which has already been created can also be subsequently edited. To this purpose select the polyline and open the context menu with the right mouse button. Select the "Activate" option to activate the individual points of the polyline, i.e. released for editing. The polyline comprises start, corner and end points. Each individual line also features another point in the center of the line. In addition the center point of the entire polyline object is displayed.
Shift start, corner or end point
Move the mouse pointer over the point you want to shift. The mouse pointer changes. Hold the mouse button down and shift the point to the required position.
Shift line center point
Move the mouse pointer over the point you want to shift. The mouse pointer changes. Hold the mouse button down and shift the point to the required position. Two new individual lines are created with one new center point each.
4-74
Draw menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
1 Start point
4 End point
2 Corner point
5 Center point
3 Intermediate point Polyline point types
Fig. 4-64
Alternatively click the point you wish to shift, move the mouse pointer to the required new position and reposition it by reclicking. The coordinates of the start, corner and end points can also be entered numerically with the "Action" tool bar.
Modify polyline action bar
Fig. 4-65
Removing points
Click the respective point and remove it by pressing the key.
Shift polyline object
Move over the center point of the object, hold the mouse button down and shift the polyline object to the required position.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Draw menu
4-75
6.6
> Ellipse
After selecting the "Ellipse" submenu in the "Draw" menu there are various different options for drawing ellipses. The "Action" tool bar changes correspondingly.
Ellipse action bar
Fig. 4-66
> Center and radii With this function an ellipse is created from the parameters center point, main and second radius.
1 Main radius
3 Angle
2 Second radius Ellipse: Center point, radii and angle
Fig. 4-67
The angle of the main axis to the horizontal is determined at the same time with the destination point of the main radius. > Center and 2 tangents This function is used to create an ellipse which has a defined center point and which touches two lines of the drawing at a tangent. First the center point is determined and then the two tangents selected. > From five points This function creates an ellipse from five points.
4-76
Draw menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
6.7
> Arc of an ellipse
After selecting the submenu "Arc of an ellipse" in the "Draw" menu there are various options for drawing arcs of ellipses available. The "Action" tool bar changes accordingly. Ellipse arcs are created with the aid of the functions described in the "Ellipses" section. If an arc of an ellipse is created from the center point, the main and second radius, it is necessary to enter the start and end angle as well as the ellipse parameters described in the "Ellipse" section.
1 Main radius
4 Start angle
2 Second radius
5 End angle
3 Main angle Arc of an ellipse
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Draw menu
Fig. 4-68
4-77
6.8
> Bitmap
When the "Bitmap" submenu is selected, a bitmap can be pasted into the drawing. This can serve as a design feature, but is often also useful as a construction background when data are to be used. The following bitmap file formats are supported: •
BMP (Windows Bitmap format)
•
TIFF (Tagged Image File Format)
•
JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group Format)
•
PCX (Zsoft Bitmap format)
> Open
Supported bitmap formats
Fig. 4-69
Select the required bitmap file from the menu window which opens when the function is activated.
4-78
Draw menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Size and position of the bitmap
Fig. 4-70
In the next step, you determine the size of the bitmaps. Here, you can specify whether the bitmap shall keep the width-to-height ratio. Furthermore, you can enter the angle to the base line. After you have confirmed the entry by clicking on "OK", a frame appears in the size of the image and can be positioned on the drawing field. At the end, the bitmap resolution must be defined.
Image resolution
Fig. 4-71
The different characteristics of the bitmap can be changed at a later stage. To do this, mark the bitmap object, click the right mouse button and select "Properties".
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Draw menu
4-79
> Modify bitmap properties
"Modify bitmap properties" dialog window
Fig. 4-72
Card Bitmap Stipulates the position ("X", "Y") and the size ("Width", "Height") of the bitmap object. It is also possible to determine whether the side ratio should be maintained if the size is changed ("Maintain side ratio"). Card Layer The bitmap object can be assigned a certain drawing layer (details refer to Section 9.1 "> Layers"). Card Laser Laser parameters can be assigned to the bitmap object, parameter settings can be modified (details refer to Section 7.3 "Laser" > "Laser parameters"). Card Resolution The resolution of the bitmap and the connection with a variable can be determined. Note When a laser parameter is allocated, the bitmap is lasered with a so-called dithering process. The (laser) point density of the gray shade is then modified. With a high point density the bitmap appears dark at the respective position, and with a low point density light. If sequence is allocated to the bitmap as a laser parameter (refer to the Section 7.3 "Laser menu" > "Laser parameter" > "Sequence"), the gray level depth of the bitmap object is converted so that it corresponds to the number of laser parameters contained in the sequence (for example if 16 laser parameters are contained in the sequence, the bitmap is converted to a 16 gray level bitmap). The first parameter within the sequence lasers the darkest, the last parameter the lightest points (gray level). Each pixel of the bitmap is lasered with the laser parameters corresponding to its gray level.
4-80
Draw menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
6.9
> Dimensioning
After selecting the "Dimensioning" submenu in the "Draw" menu various dimensions can be created. The "Action" tool bar changes correspondingly.
"Action" dimensioning tool bar
Fig. 4-73
> Horizontal/Vertical/Diagonal With these functions horizontal/vertical and diagonal dimensions from the start, end and position point of dimensioning are created. Jump mode is automatically switched on for the start and end point. The position point appears as a suggested value offset by the double dimensioning text size either upwards or downwards in order to obtain a defined distance with multiple dimensions. To this purpose the dimension must be concluded without changing the position point with .
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Draw menu
4-81
> Radius/Diameter With this function a radius or diameter dimension is created. To this purpose move to an arc of a circle and then determine the position point for dimensioning.
Dimensioning, Radius/Diameter
Fig. 4-74
> Angle (3 points) With this function an angle dimension formed from start, center, end and position point of the dimension is created Jump mode is automatically switched on for the start, center and end point. The dimensioning angle is created from the angle between both lines "center point start point" and "center point end point" > Angle (4 points) With this function an angle dimension formed from two lines with the start, center, end and position point of the dimension is created. Jump mode is automatically switched on for the start and end points. > Angle (2 lines) This function measures an angle formed with two lines. The dimensioning angle results from the angle between the two lines.
4-82
Draw menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
6.10 > Hatching After selecting the "Hatching" submenu in the "Draw" menu hatching can be allocated to objects. The "Action" tool bar changes correspondingly.
Hatching action bar
Fig. 4-75
> Inside point This function is used to create hatching by specifying the inside point. When the mouse pointer is inside a closed edging, hatching is calculated in accordance with the hatching style. To apply hatching, press the left mouse button. In the "Action" tool bar the hatching styles can be set or modified which determine the concrete appearance of the hatching. > With islands If rectangles or polygons are drawn inside one another, only the part of the rectangle or polygon is filled which was selected. Islands are then created inside the hatching. Proceed as follows to implement islands inside the hatching: Draw the required hatching; select "With islands". Finally select the outer object for hatching; all objects are hatched. The program prompts the user to select the required islands. Conclude the function with .
6.11 > Point This function is used to draw a point. The geometric shape of the point in the drawing is defined in "Tools" > "Options" > "Point", refer to Section 10.9 "Tools menu" > "Options".
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Draw menu
4-83
6.12 > Tools After selecting the submenu "Tools" in the "Draw" menu existing objects can be reworked.
Tools action bar
Fig. 4-76
> Trim (cut off) This function is used to cut over overhangs from objects. The geometric coherence may possibly be lost, a rectangle is broken up into individual lines, a circle into an arc. After activation of the function the mouse pointer assumes the form of a pair of scissors, indicating that a trimming procedure can be initiated. In order to cancel the function, press the key or select another menu item. > Break
1 One line Tools, Break
2 Three lines Fig. 4-77
With this function an object can be divided at its intersection points among other objects of the drawing. The existing geometric coherence may be lost, a rectangle is broken up into individual lines, a circle into an arc.
4-84
Draw menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
After activation of the function the mouse pointer assumes the shape of a pair of scissors, indicating that trimming can be initiated. To exit the function, press or select another menu point. > Extend With this function it is possible to extend objects to the next intersection point with another object of the drawing. The position of the mouse pointer stipulates which side of a line or an arc of a circle should be extended. If a mouse pointer is positioned above parts of an object which can be extended, it changes shape. The respective object is extended by clicking. If the extension is to reach through to a certain object, this can be first selected when holding down the or key – all clicked next objects are then extended to the selected object. In this manner an object can be extended to objects without a common intersection point or to objects which are not in immediate proximity. To exit the function, press the key or select another menu item. > Champfer With this function corners of lines (polylines, rectangles, polygons) can be capitalized. The existing geometric links are lost, the object is broken down into individual lines. If the mouse pointer is on parts of objects which can be rounded, it changes its form, the object is capitalized by clicking. The following properties can be entered in the "Action" tool bar. The setting in "Distance" is used to specify whether it is defined: •
As a length of the capitalized line section ("Side length"),
•
As a length of the vertical on the chamfer through the corner point ("Distance from the corner"),
•
As a length of the chamfer ("Length of the chamfer").
The setting in angle is used to specify whether it is defined: •
As an angle between the chamfered line section and chamfer ("to the side"),
•
As an angle between the capitalized and bisecting line of the original lines ("to the center").
To exit the function, press the key or select another menu item.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Draw menu
4-85
> Fillet (round) With this function corners of lines (polylines, rectangles, polygons) can be rounded. The existing geometric links are lost, the object is broken down into individual lines. If the mouse pointer is above parts of objects which can be rounded, it changes its form, the object is rounded by clicking. If the selected rounding radius is too great, rounding is not performed. The rounding radius can be entered in the "Action" tool bar. To exit the function, press the key or select another menu item. Modify the fillet radius
The fillet radius of an arc of a circle which was created by rounding, i.e. which connects tangentially with two lines or arcs, can be subsequently changed while retaining the tangential alignment. To this purpose select the arc of the circle, open the context menu by clicking the right mouse button and perform the required changes in the "Properties" dialog window. > Group fillet (fillet all corners of a path) This function is used to uniformly round all corners of linked lines or circle arcs (also of polygons or rectangles). The existing geometric coherence is lost, the object is broken down into individual lines. If the mouse pointer is above parts of objects which can be rounded, it changes its form, the object is rounded by clicking. If the selected rounding radius is too great, rounding is not performed. The rounding radius can be entered in the "Action" tool bar. To exit the function, press the key or select another menu item.
Modify the fillet radius
The fillet radius of an arc of a circle which was created by rounding, i.e. which connects tangentially with two lines or arcs, can be subsequently changed while retaining the tangential alignment. To this purpose pick the arc of the circle, open the context menu by clicking the right mouse button and perform the required changes in the "Properties" dialog window.
4-86
Draw menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
> Concave fillet (groove) With this function corners of lines (polylines or rectangles) can be grooved. The existing geometric coherence is lost, the object is broken down into individual lines. If the mouse pointer is above parts of objects which can be grooved, it changes its form, the object is grooved by clicking. The grooving radius can be entered in the "Action" tool bar. To exit the function, press the key or select another menu item. > Equidistant (Offset) With this function an equidistant can be created at a fixed distance parallel to an open or closed line (rectangle, polyline, lines with arcs of circles) so that the minimum distance is the same in all points. If an equidistant is to be applied to the entire object, move the mouse pointer on the object. In the "Action" tool bar the current set distance is displayed and can be modified if required. Conclude the action by clicking the mouse button or the Enter key. If an equidistant is only to be applied to part of a contour, the start and end points can be determined by clicking the mouse button while holding down the key or by an entry in the "Action" tool bar. The / keys can be used to switch between any different connection paths.
Tools, Equidistant
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Draw menu
Fig. 4-78
4-87
> Round off lines Using this function, two lines which are not touching each other can be closed by means of a circular arc. If the mouse pointer is over a line which is to be rounded with a second line, it changes its shape. The procedure starts by clicking the mouse. As soon as the mouse pointer touches the two lines, the circular arc with the set rounding radius is automatically shown. By clicking on the second line, the lines are connected to the circular arc. Only objects of line type can be connected in this way. In the "Action" tool bar, you can enter the rounding radius. To exit the function, press the key or select another menu item.
6.13 > Data object The "Data object" submenu in the "Draw" menu permits compilation of text or barcodes. When the "Data object" submenu has been selected, a dialog window opens in which it can be selected whether a text or a barcode should be created. Data object
"Data object" dialog window
Fig. 4-79
The text or value used in the data object can be fixed and invariable ("static object") or defined as a variable. Variables are only filled with the required content during marking.
4-88
Draw menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Reference variable Here a reference variable can be selected by its name from a list. The selection "Static object" permits the creation of invariable text. Button Change list of variables This entry opens a dialog window in which object variables can be defined, modified and organized. Details are contained in the Section "Menu" > "Laser" > "Variables". Group field Appearance Option As text The data object to be created is shown as text. Button Properties text This button opens a dialog window in which the text can be entered and its properties defined. See Section "Data object" > "As text" > "Text". Option As barcode The data object to be created is shown as a machine-readable code. Button Barcode properties This button opens a dialog window in which the properties of the barcode can be defined, refer to Section "Data object" > "As barcode" > "Barcode". Button Place This button interactively inserts the previously created data object (text or barcode) with the selected properties into the drawing. The object is fixed on the mouse pointer and can be moved to any position and inserted by clicking with the mouse button. When the "Action" tool bar is activated, a dialog window opens which permits the numeric entry of the required position coordinates as well as the horizontal angle of the data object. In addition the "Properties" button can be used to make subsequent modifications to the properties.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Draw menu
4-89
> Data object > As text > Select card Text Text is entered in this dialog window, its properties determined and its position determined. Properties of the text object
"Properties of the text object" dialog window
Fig. 4-80
Card Text Text entry The required text is entered here. Texts with more than one line are also possible. Note Entry of special characters can possibly produce unwanted results as several keyboard drivers block Unicode conversion. It is therefore possible to directly insert the Unicode code of a special character directly into the text. It starts with: "\u", followed by the number "12345" in decimal characters and is concluded with ";". Example: CITRO\u203;N Æ CITROËN This conversion can be switched off in this dialog if required (see below). The Unicode number of a special character can be determined with the Font Editor. Text size Here the text size can be changed. If no entries are made, the setting of the Font Editor for the text size is taken as a standard.
4-90
Draw menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Font Here the character set is selected. All character sets can be used which have been created and registered with the Font Editor. Select "No Unicode conversion (\u12345;)" The character combination "\u12345;" is not interpreted as a Unicode number, but left unchanged. Select "Mirrored" Text is mirrored horizontally. Character spacing Here the character spacing can be changed. If no entries are made (character spacing remains "100%"), the setting of the Font Editor for the character spacing is taken as a standard. Line spacing Here the text line spacing can be changed. If no entries are made (line spacing remains "0 mm"), the setting of the Font Editor for the line spacing is taken as a standard. Font spacing Here the font spacing can be changed. If no entries are made (font spacing remains "100%"), the setting of the Font Editor for the font spacing is taken as a standard. Italic Here the italics can be changed. If no entries are made (italics remain "0°"), the setting of the Font Editor for the italics is taken as a standard.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Draw menu
4-91
> Data object > As text > Select card Position The position of the entered text is determined in this dialog window. Properties of the text object
"Properties of the text object" dialog window
Fig. 4-81
Card Position Group field Horizontal Option Left The insertion point of the text is on the left-hand side of the textbox, the text is positioned flush left in the text box. Option Centered The insertion point of the text is horizontally in the center of the textbox, the text is centered in the text box. Option Right The insertion point of the text is on the right-hand side of the textbox, the text is positioned flush right in the text box. Option Justification The text is positioned as justified in the textbox if the "Break" textbox is set.
4-92
Draw menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Group field Vertical Option Bottom The insertion point of the text is at the bottom edge of the textbox. Option Base line The insertion point of the text is vertically on the base line of the text block (with texts of several lines: On the base line of the first line of text). This base line is defined in Font Editor for this character set. Option Centered The insertion point of the text is vertically in the center of the textbox. Option Top The insertion point of the text is at the top edge of the textbox. X position The X position of a text which is already in the drawing can be changed from the properties window here. Y position The Y position of a text which is already in the drawing can be changed from the properties window here. Angle The angle of the text is set here. Group field Circular text The text is arranged in a circular form. Radius Here the radius for the circle is specified on which the text is arranged. To position the circular text with the top of the character facing inwards to the center of the circle, the radius must have a negative preceding sign. Position rotation The position rotation states the angle around which the text is regularly distributed. The center of the text is therefore on the angle stated here. Text of several lines is positioned in succession.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Draw menu
4-93
Group field Textbox Option No box The text is inserted without a textbox in keeping with the text size. Option Break Depending on the set width of the textbox, lines with existing spaces are broken so that the text is inside the textbox. Individual words which are longer than the textbox width remain unchanged. Option Cut If the text is larger than the specified textbox size, it is cut off. Option Fit If the text is larger than the specified textbox size, it is adapted by compression. Width Here the required textbox width is specified. Height Here the required textbox height is specified.
4-94
Draw menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
> Data object > as barcode > Select card Barcode In this dialog window the text to be coded is entered, its properties determined, its position and accompanying text is defined. Properties of the barcode object
"Properties of the barcode object" dialog window
Fig. 4-82
Card Barcode Text The text for coding is entered here. It depends on the set barcode type which characters can be coded.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Draw menu
4-95
Barcode type The various barcode types vary considerably with regard to the characters which can be used, the coding and the length of the required text. Available 1D barcodes
No. of characters
Character sets Length of characters
Check mark/ quantity
Check mark/ algorithm
Code 2/5 Code 2/5 interleaved
10
0..9
even number
no
no
10
0..9
even number
optional 1
2/5 Modulo 10
Code 39
43
0..9 A..Z .+-*/
%$variable
optional 1
Modulo 43
Code CODABAR 19
0..9 A B C D +-/
%$variable
no
no
Code 93
43
0..9 A..Z .+-*/
%$variable
optional 2
?
Code 11
12
0..9 + -
variable
1 fix (optional 2)
e/o Modulo 11
Code 128 A
105
0..9 A..Z
variable
1 fix c
Modulo 103
Code 128 B
105
0..9 a..z A..Z
variable
1 fix c
Modulo 103
Code 128 C
105
0..9
variable
1 fix c
Modulo 103
Code EAN8
10
0..9
7 + 1 test char. 1 fix c
e/o Modulo 10
Code EAN13
10
0..9
12 + 1 t.c.
1 fix c
e/o Modulo 10
Code EAN14 (2/5i)
10
0..9
13 + 1 t.c.
1 fix c
e/o Modulo 10
Code EAN128 A
105
0..9 A..Z
19 + 1 t.c.
2 fix c
Modulo 10+103
Code EAN128 B
105
0..9 a..z A..Z
19 + 1 t.c.
2 fix c
Modulo 10+103
Code EAN128 C
105
0..9
19 + 1 t.c.
2 fix c
Modulo 10+103
Code UPC A
10
0..9
11 + 1 t.c.
1 fix c
e/o Modulo 10
Code UPC E
10
0..9
0+6
fix in parity
fix in parity
Available 1D barcodes
Tab. 4-1
c = invariable. Changes in settings do not have any influence on the barcode geometry.
4-96
Available 1D barcodes
Module width =X in mm
Font spacing in mm
Ratio wide/narrow
Code 2/5
0.19..
-continuous d
2.0..4.5
Code 2/5 interleaved
0.19..
-continuous d
2.0..3.0
Code 39
0.19..
1..5.3 x X
2.0..3.0
Draw menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Available 1D barcodes
Module width =X in mm
Font spacing in mm
Ratio wide/narrow
Code CODABAR
0.19..
1..5.3 x X
2.4..3.5
Code 93
0.19..
-continuous d
fix c
Code 11
0.19..
-continuous d
2.24..3.5
Code 128A,B,C
0.19..1.27
-continuous d
fix c
Code EAN8
0.27..0.66
-continuous d
fix c
Code EAN13
0.27..0.66
-continuous d
fix c
Code EAN14 (2/5i)
0.27..0.66
-continuous d
2.0..3.0
Code EAN128A,B,C
0.19..1.27
-continuous d
fix c
Code UPC A
0.27..0.66
-continuous d
fix c
Code UPC E
0.27..0.66
-continuous d
fix c Tab. 4-2
c = permanently specified. Changes in settings do not have any influence on the barcode geometry. d = continuous. If the spaces between the individual barcode characters do not serve as space markers but for information coding, the barcode has the property continuous. Barcodes in which spaces can occur between the characters are referred to as discreet barcodes, e.g. Code 39 and Codabar.
Available 2D barcodes
No. of characters
Character sets
Check mark/ quantity
Check mark/ algorithm
Datamatrix
128 ASCII
Red Solomon
Datamatrix square 128 ASCII
Red Solomon
PDF417
128 ASCII
Red Solomon
QR Code Numeric
10
0..9
7,15,25,30%
Red Solomon
QR Code Alphanumeric
45
0..9 A..Z space $ %*+-./:);
7,15,25,30%
Red Solomon
QR Code Binary
255 ASCII
7,15,25,30%
Red Solomon
QR Code Kanji
UNICODE
7,15,25,30%
Red Solomon
Dotcode Tab. 4-3
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Draw menu
4-97
Available 2D barcodes
Rows
Columns
Square
Maximum character length
Datamatrix
10..144 Stepsize 2,4,..
10..144
1
Numeric 3116 Alphanumeric 2335
Datamatrix square 8..18
18..48
0
PDF417
3..90 Stepsize 1
1..30 Stepsize 1
0
QR Code Numeric
21..73 Stepsize 4
21..73 Stepsize 4
1
1.167
QR Code Alphanumeric
21..73 Stepsize 4
21..73 Stepsize 4
1
707
QR Code Binary
21..73 Stepsize 4
21..73 Stepsize 4
1
486
QR Code Kanji
21..73 Stepsize 4
21..73 Stepsize 4
1
299
Dot code
6
6..9
1 Tab. 4-4
Format Here the format of the 2D barcode can be set. Coding Here the coding of the 2D barcode can be set. Select "Filling alternately" The code is alternately filled. Select "Invert" In the event of light marking on a dark background the barcode must be inverted with certain code types. The intervals are marked and the bars omitted. For better visibility the width and the height of the idle zone (see below) can be adjusted. Select "With check mark" The check mark is also output.
4-98
Draw menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Select "Round modules" With the 2D barcodes the individual modules are not output as rectangles but as circles. The arc resolution of these circles can be set (see below). Select "Draw module frame" A module frame is drawn around each individual module additionally to the actual filling in order to smooth the edge. Select "Module frame before filling" The module frame is drawn before the filling. Font spacing On some barcode types the distance between the individual characters can be set. Ratio wide/narrow On some barcode types the ratio of the wide bars to the narrow bars can be set. Filling distance lines Here the filling distance of the filling lines to the module frame is set. Filling distance to the module frame Here the edge of the filling to the calculated module frame is set. Idle zone, Width Here the idle zone in front of and behind the barcode is set for inverted barcodes which is necessary to make the first module visible for reading devices. Idle zone, Height Here the idle zone above and below the barcode is set for inverted barcodes. Arc resolution in degrees In round modules of the 2D barcode the arc resolution is set here in degrees.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Draw menu
4-99
Data object > As barcode > Select card Position/size Properties of the barcode object
"Properties of the barcode object" dialog window
Fig. 4-83
Card Position/size X position The X position of a barcode which is already in the drawing can be changed from the properties window here. Y position The Y position of a barcode which is already in the drawing can be changed from the properties window here. Angle of rotation The rotation of the barcode is set.
4-100
Draw menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Option Total size Width The entire width of the barcode can be set. The width of the individual modules is selected so that all modules can be fitted in this width. Height The total height of the barcode can be set. The barcode height of the individual modules is adjusted. Option Module size Barcode height The height of an individual module of the barcode can be set. The total height of the barcode is adjusted to this height. Module width The width of an individual module of the barcode can be set. The total width of the barcode is adjusted to this height. Select "One line barcode" Here the barcode is marked with a centered line instead of two border lines.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Draw menu
4-101
> Data object > As barcode > Select card Text Properties of the barcode object
"Properties of the barcode object" dialog window
Fig. 4-84
Card Text Select "Display also text" The text of the barcode is displayed as plain text together with the barcode. Font Here the font is selected. All fonts can be used which have been created and registered with the Font Editor. Relative position X The plain text can be changed in its position in the X direction in relation to the existing barcode (left-hand bottom barcode corner = 0.0). The normal positions are accessible with presetting with the functions "Horizontal text position" and with the function "Set position".
4-102
Draw menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Relative position Y The plain text can be changed in its position in the Y direction in relation to the existing barcode (left-hand bottom barcode corner = 0.0). The normal positions are accessible with presetting with the functions "Horizontal text position" and with the function "Set position". Relative angle The angle of the plain text can be changed in relation to the existing barcode. The normal positions are accessible with presetting with the functions "Horizontal text position" and with the function "Set position". – Horizontal text position Option Left The text is inserted flush left in relation to the existing barcode. The respective values of the "Relative position" change automatically. Option Center The text is inserted at the center in relation to the existing barcode. The respective values of the "Relative position" change automatically. Option Right The text is inserted flush right in relation to the existing barcode. The respective values of the "Relative position" change automatically. Text size Here the text size can be changed. If no entries are made, the setting of the Font Editor for the text size is taken as a standard.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Draw menu
4-103
Group field Set position Down The text is inserted below the existing barcode. The respective values of the "Relative position" and the "Relative angle" change automatically. Top The text is inserted above the existing barcode. The respective values of the "Relative position" and the "Relative angle" change automatically. Left The text is inserted to the left of the existing barcode rotated by 90 degrees. The respective values of the "Relative position" and the "Relative angle" change automatically. Right The text is inserted to the right of the existing barcode rotated by 90 degrees. The respective values of the "Relative position" and the "Relative angle" change automatically.
4-104
Draw menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
7.
Laser menu
In this menu, settings are made which affect the marking process.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Laser menu
Fig. 4-85
Laser menu
4-105
7.1
> Print project
Various project data can be printed with this menu item. The Print equipment dialog window is displayed first after selecting this item. The "Print project" dialog window appears after selecting the printer and confirming with "OK". You can activate various options.
Print project
Fig. 4-86
Printable area The values in the fields specify the size of the printable area (paper format). Select "Print laser parameter" The names of the laser parameters used are printed by activating this checkbox. Select "Print main parameter" The main parameters are also printed by activating this checkbox. Select "Print internal parameter" The internal laser parameters are also printed by activating this checkbox. Select "Print lines width parameter" The parameters configured in the menu "Laser" > "Laser parameters > Width" are printed by activating this checkbox.
4-106
Laser menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Select "Print project data" The project data entered via the menu item "Laser" > "Project data" are printed by activating this checkbox. Select "Print drawing" The drawing is printed by activating this checkbox. Select "Print segmentation" The segmentation data is printed by activating this checkbox. Font project data You can define the font and font size here of the project data to be printed. Font laser parameter You can define the font and font size here of the laser parameters to be printed. Select "Show preview" A preview is displayed prior to printing by activating this checkbox.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Laser menu
4-107
7.2
> Export project data as XML file
This menu point enables to export the project data as XML file.
Export project data
Fig. 4-87
Here the target directory and the name are determined. A special directory has been preset. With the button "+" a new path can be defined.
7.3
> Laser parameters
The laser parameters are a central part of the marking program. They determine how the laser beam affects the workpiece and therefore have a considerable effect on the quality of marking and the marking time. Basic information on laser parameters
There are two principle types of laser parameter: •
global or internal parameters and
•
local parameters in the current project/marking program.
Global (internal) parameters apply for all projects. Here laser parameters are saved which can always be used for different projects, for example annealing V2A. The parameters of the current project can therefore normally be derived from these global parameters.
Change of global laser parameters! These values are globally optimized at the works and saved in the registration database of the computer. CAUTION
4-108
¾ They should therefore only be changed by trained operating personnel!
Laser menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
The global parameters are saved in the file 'LaserCADIni.xml'. The program saves the path for this central file in the registration database of the respective computer. For this reason networked computers can access a joint 'LaserCADIni-file' which was saved on a server. The local parameters are saved in the respective marking program. Local parameters can be defined in two ways:
Local parameters as reference
•
as references to global parameters,
•
as copies.
Local parameters compare themselves each time a project is started with the global parameters of the same name in the file 'LaserCADIni.xml' and take their settings. Changes and optimization of the global laser parameters therefore flow automatically into the respective projects. If a global parameter is deleted, the program automatically uses the reference as a copy.
Local parameters as copy
Local parameters remain static in the marking program and can only be explicitly changed. This mechanism is only then useful if you consciously want to deviate from the set laser parameters in a special case. Note Generally the option "Local parameters as copy" is the best for defining local parameters, as the copy can only then be optimized for the specific workpiece without affecting the (original) global parameters (and therefore other workpieces).
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Laser menu
4-109
Administrate laser parameter
For all laser marking systems
"Administrate laser parameter" dialog window
Structure and use
Fig. 4-88
In the left-hand window of the dialog window "Administrate laser parameter" a tree directory appears which shows the structures of the parameters. In this directory tree folders can be opened and closed and individual entries moved to change their sequence in the same way as in Windows. The parameters can be moved by highlighting with the mouse pointer and dragging to the required position. If the parameter is dragged to a folder, it is inserted into this folder. The name can be changed by double-clicking the existing name. A highlighted entry can be deleted with the key. Moving a defined global parameter to the local department automatically generates a copy with a reference, i.e. this parameter is used now in the current project and changes automatically each time when the global parameter is modified. If the key is held down when a defined global parameter is moved into the local department, a local parameter is created as a true copy. This copied parameter is not linked with a global parameter, it is only valid for this project and is not automatically adjusted.
4-110
Laser menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
It is also possible to move parameters from the local to the global department. This is, however, only of use if a parameter created as a local parameter is to be globally used as a copy. The "Reference" property is marked with an additional icon (small downward arrow). If a local reference parameter does not find its global reference (which it searches for with the parameter name), a different reference symbol appears (small question mark). Each time a project has started this parameter then searches once more for a global reference, also if it is, for example, used on another computer. If the global reference is not found in such a case, the parameters of the global reference saved as a copy are used. Additional modifications of the laser parameters can be made with the following submenus:
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
•
Administrate
•
Main parameters
•
Intern
•
Width
•
Dotted line
•
Sequence
Laser menu
4-111
> Laser parameters > Card Administrate The most important information for administration of laser parameters are made in this window. Administrate laser parameters
For all laser marking systems
"Administrate laser parameter" dialog window
Fig. 4-89
Button Insert new parameter A new parameter can be created. In the left-hand folder window an entry must be highlighted (either in the section "Global parameters" or "in this project"). After selecting "Insert new parameter" a new laser parameter is created. It is automatically given a name (parameter X), which can then be changed (refer to the section "Structure and use"). Button Delete entry The entry (parameter or folder) highlighted in the left-hand directory window is deleted. If a global laser parameter is deleted from which local parameters are derived as a reference, the icon changes (upward arrow with question mark) to show that the reference parameter is no longer there.
4-112
Laser menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
If the message "This parameter cannot be deleted as it is in use" appears, the parameter is an element of a sequential laser parameter and must first be removed in the "Reference" submenu (also refer to the "Reference" section) or the laser parameter is allocated to one or more objects in the marking program (in this case the respective objects must first be allocated to another laser parameter before it can be deleted). Button Copy parameter In the left-hand folder window an entry must be highlighted (either in the section "Global parameters" or "in this project"). After selecting "Copy parameter" a new laser parameter is created in accordance with the highlighted one which has identical values. It is automatically given a name (parameter X), which can then be changed (refer to the section "Structure and Use"). Group field Global parameters Button Insert new folder This function serves to structure the section "Global parameters" (e.g. in accordance with different materials which have to be processed) and is therefore only available in the "Global parameters" section. An entry must be highlighted in the left-hand directory window. After selecting "Insert new folder" a new folder is created after the highlighted folder. It must have a name. Any number of subfolders can also be created. – In new projects Option Do not use This function can be used to define that one or more "Global parameters" are not automatically valid in new projects (e.g. as they are only seldom used). This property can also be allocated to folders; all parameters which are in the respective folder are not active in new projects. Option Use as reference In the left hand directory window an entry must be selected in the "Global parameters" section. The selected parameters are automatically available as a reference in new projects. They are automatically updated when the global parameters of the same name are changed.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Laser menu
4-113
Option Use as copy In the left hand directory window an entry must be selected in the "Global parameters" section. The selected parameters are automatically available as a copy in new projects. They are not automatically updated when the global parameters of the same name are changed. – Parameters in this project Option Reference In the left hand directory window an entry must be selected in the "Local parameters" section. The selected parameters are automatically available as a reference in the current project. They are automatically updated when the global parameters of the same name are changed. Option Copy In the left hand directory window an entry must be selected in the "Local parameters" section. The selected parameters are automatically available as a copy in the current project. They are not automatically updated when the global parameters of the same name are changed. > Laser parameters > Card Main parameter In this dialog window the main parameters of a laser parameter selected in the left-hand directory window are set. This function is not available: •
with sequence "Sequence"),
•
with local parameters which are defined as reference to global parameters (also refer to the section "Administrate laser parameter" > "Administrate").
parameters
(also
refer
to
the
section
The set values are displayed graphically between the left-hand directory window and the dialog window. A scale in millimeters shows the actual size of the laser points which are displayed in color. The image depends on the set speed, the pulse frequency and the track width.
4-114
Laser menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Administrate laser parameters
For all laser marking systems
"Administrate laser parameters" dialog window
Fig. 4-90
Note In the submenu "Main parameter" the program only permits the entry of values in a range which is technically possible or recommendable for laser marking. If values drop below or exceed these limits, a prompt window opens which shows the permissible value range. Defocusing Setting of the value around which the focus of the laser beam is outside the focus during marking. Defocusing can assume positive and negative values. With positive values the focus is below the working distance (the working distance increases) and with negative values the focus is above the working distance (the working distance decreases). The maximum adjustable value depends on the lens employed. This function can be used if
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
•
a focus diameter which is larger than the minimum possible focus diameter is to be set on the workpiece (e.g. to obtain a greater track width on the workpiece) or
•
marking is not performed on one level, but on different levels (different marking heights).
Laser menu
4-115
Color Here it is possible to define which display colors the drawing elements (lines, circles, rectangles etc.) which are provided with this laser parameter are to have on the screen or the printer. The selected color does not have any influence on the results of the laser output, it only serves for better orientation within the drawing. In addition to the standard color individual colors can be defined with the "other colors" option. Z offset Setting of the value around which the focus of the laser beam can be offset in relation to the current Z position of the Z axis. This function can be used to obtain certain effects with varying marking heights. This is only possible if the beam source is mounted on a motorized movable Z axis. If the offset is within the range which can be achieved with defocusing (see above), this parameter should be used, as this is considerably faster than moving the Z axis. Track width This value influences the graphic display of the laser points in the dialog window and in the drawing itself. The actual track width on the workpiece requiring marking depends on the material and laser and must therefore be determined experimentally. The entered value influences the filling routine during marking of codes (e.g. barcode or DataMatrix Code) and the line spacing during use of the option "Parallel line" (refer to Section "Laser parameter" > "Width"). Note This image can be switched on and off for zoomed images under "View, only thin lines". Power Setting of the laser power in percent of the maximum power of the employed laser. The required value can be entered from the keyboard or the slide control.
4-116
Laser menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Velocity Setting of the scanning speed in millimeters per second. The required value can be entered from the keyboard or the slide control. The top and bottom limits depend on the laser hardware and are saved in the registration database of the computer. Pulse frequency Setting of the pulse repetition frequency in Hertz. The required value can be entered from the keyboard or the slide control. The top and bottom limits depend on the laser hardware and are saved in the registration database of the computer. Button Pulse Opens two input fields into which the number of pulses per point and the pulse width can be entered in microseconds. Administrate laser parameters
For all laser marking systems
"Administrate laser parameters" dialog window
Fig. 4-91
The entry of the number of pulses per point is only relevant during marking of bitmaps and points. With the pulse width the opening time of the "Q-switch" (switch for pulsing the beam) and therefore the pulse form and the length are influenced. The pulse width should be set to 5 microseconds as a standard. Greater pulse widths mean a longer pulse duration. The pulse duration is in the ns range (Nanoseconds).
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Laser menu
4-117
First pulse The first pulse of a series of pulses (e.g. of a line), in particular at high pulse frequencies, has more energy than the following pulse. The first pulse can therefore cause a hole at the beginning of the line. TruTops Mark® provides two different methods for minimizing this effect. They are referred to as FirstPulseKiller (FPK) and FirstPulseSuppression (FPS). The setting options in the "First pulse" input field depend on the settings in the TruTops Mark® configuration. Administrate laser parameters
For laser marking systems Series 3000 and 6000
"Laser parameters, Main parameter, First pulse" dialog window
Fig. 4-92
The first pulse is deleted completely with FPK marking. The excess energy is slowly and evenly applied to the workpiece prior to the pulse series instead. This method is suitable for marking metal in particular. It can scorch plastic however.
4-118
Laser menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
With FPS marking, the excess energy is distributed as evenly as possible among the first pulses. The required settings depend on the "Power", "Pulse frequency" and "Pulse amplitude" laser parameters. They can be set globally with the diagnostics tool. An attenuation value is assigned (to the first twelve pulses of a pulse series) in the process. This setting is difficult since the attenuation value of the pulse does not only affect the first but also the following pulse. Ideally, the energy of the first pulses is monitored during the optimization process by means of a quick photodiode and an oscilloscope. Alternatively, the optimization can be based on the application results. As an alternative to the two methods, you can do without first pulse treatment. This is recommended in the event of low pulse frequencies in particular. Note Since changing the first pulse method affects the progress at the beginning of a line, the internal laser parameter "Laser on delay" may under certain circumstances have to be adjusted manually. Administrate laser parameters For laser marking systems Series 3000 and 6000
"Laser parameters, Main parameter, Mode" dialog window
Fig. 4-93
Mode: PULSED The pulsed mode corresponds to the default setting. Mode: CW The CW (Continuous Wave) mode refers to a continuous line operation. In continuous line operation, instead of the pulse number the point duration for the marking of a point is indicated in microseconds.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Laser menu
4-119
Simmer Contrary to the first pulse with Series 3000 and 6000, for laser marking system 5000 there is no first pulse rejection but a first pulse amplification which is entered in percent in the "Simmer" field. The first point pulses have a maximal pulse energy when set on 100%. The default setting is 90%. When operating with high pulse frequences and low power, lower percent values are recommended. Administrate laser parameters
For laser marking system Series 5000
"Laser parameters, Main parameter, Simmer" dialog window
Fig. 4-94
According to the set mode, the display of the dialog window changes. Mode: PULSED The pulsed mode corresponds to the default setting. If the "Auto" checkbox is activated, a minimum of pulse duration for the selected frequency is selected which still provides an average output. This corresponds to a maximum possible pulse peak power for the selected pulse frequency. If "Auto" is not activated, the pulse duration can be selected via the drop-down arrow. In case the selection combination of pulse frequency and pulse duration results in an impaired laser power, a red frame appears around the entry field "Power". A full output can be achieved by increasing the pulse frequency or pulse duration.
4-120
Laser menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Mode: CWM When using the CWM (Continuous Wave modulated) mode, the continuous line operation is interrrupted by the pulse frequency. The pulse duration of the resulting pulses is indicated in percent of the period time. The period time is the time interval between two pulses.
Multihead With a Multihead system, a laser head or both laser heads can be assigned to the laser parameter. Administrate laser parameters
For all laser marking systems with a double head system
"Laser parameters, Main parameter, Multihead" dialog window
Fig. 4-95
Head To make a mark with laser head A, select "A1". Select "B1" for laser head B. Select "A1 & B1" for synchronous marking. Note The selection of the laser heads depends on the installed and configured hardware. Contact a TRUMPF branch office in your country.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Laser menu
4-121
> Laser parameters > Card Internal In this dialog window the internal parameters of a laser parameter selected in the left-hand directory window are set. This function is not available: •
if the basic configuration does not expressly permit this
•
with sequence parameters "Sequence")
•
with local parameters which are defined as a reference to global parameters (also refer to the Section "Administrate").
(also refer
to
the Section
With the internal laser parameters further settings can be made which have an effect on the marking quality. Although they do not have any influence on the thickness of the engraving, they play a decisive role during dynamic scanning behavior (scanning velocity during certain actions).
Change of global laser parameters! These values are globally optimized at the works and saved in the registration database of the computer. CAUTION
¾ They should therefore only be changed by trained operating personnel! With the "Quality" slide control all internal parameters can be allocated common standard values. The setting ranges from "high velocity" to "high quality".
Administrate laser parameters
All laser marking systems
"Laser parameters, Internal" dialog window
4-122
Laser menu
Fig. 4-96
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Select "Using settings other than standard" If necessary all parameters can be changed individually if this option is selected. •
Polygon delay
•
Jump delay
•
Las On delay
•
Las Off delay
•
Mark delay
•
Step period
•
Jump velocity
Polygon delay This delay time is inserted at the end of each vector within a vector line. This means that all coordinates are correctly located and prevents, for example, corners being ground off. The higher the value for the polygon delay is set, the more accurately the set position is reached. The value for polygon delay influenced the marking time (the higher the value the longer marking takes). The value is given in µs. Jump delay At the end of a jump command the scanner mirrors require a certain time to reach their set position. The higher the value for the jump delay is set, the more accurately the set position is reached. The value for jump delay influences the marking time (the higher the value the longer marking takes). The value is given in µs. Las On delay When a vector line is started, the inertia of the galvanic mirror must be overcome. The "Laser On delay" states how many µs after starting of the vector line the laser should be switched on. This value does not usually influence the marking time. The value is given in µs. Las Off delay At the end of a vector line the laser must remain switched on for longer due to the following error in the galvanic control circuit of the scanner of the laser. This value does not usually influence the marking time. The value is given in µs.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Laser menu
4-123
Mark delay At the end of a vector line it must be ensured that the set position is correctly located. To this purpose the mark delay is introduced before the jump command is activated. The higher the value for the mark delay is set, the more accurately the set position is reached. The value for mark delay influences the marking time (the higher the value the longer marking takes). The value is given in µs. Step period States the period with which the set positions are sent to the scanner mirror. This value must normally not be changed. If the value is too high, inaccurate marking can occur. This value does not usually influence the marking time. The value is given in µs. Jump velocity States the velocity with which the laser jumps from one object for marking to the next. The higher the jump velocity, the shorter the marking time. If the value is too high, inaccurate marking results can occur. The value is stated in mm/s. Information for optimizing the delays This describes what can happen when internal parameters are incorrectly set. Using the letters "RTC" as an example, the following diagrams show the extent to which incorrectly set delays can affect the results. Laser on delay too short
Laser on delay too short
Fig. 4-97
Although the galvo mirrors have not yet reached the necessary angular velocity at the beginning of a vector, the laser is already switched on. The results are burn-ins at the start point of the respective vectors.
4-124
Laser menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Laser on delay too long
Laser on delay too long
Fig. 4-98
The laser is switched on too late at the beginning of a vector. The corresponding vectors are not marked from the start point onwards. Laser off delay too short
Laser off delay too short
Fig. 4-99
The laser is already switched off after a marking command although the mirrors have not yet reached the vector position. The correspon¬ding vectors are not completely marked.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Laser menu
4-125
Laser off delay too long
Laser off delay too long
Fig. 4-100
The laser is switched off too late after a marking command. The laser is still on although the mirrors are clearly being stopped or are already stationary. This causes burn-ins at each vector point. Jump delay too short
Jump delay too short
Fig. 4-101
The vector that follows a jump command is already marked during the necessary settling time of the mirrors around the end point of the jump vector. A run-in or overshoot can be seen. Jump delay too long If the selected jump delay is too long, there are no visible negative results. However, the marking time is increased.
4-126
Laser menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Marking delay too short
Marking delay too short
Fig. 4-102
Although the mirror has not yet reached the target position of the last vector, the command of the subsequent jump vector is already being carried out. As a result, the end of the marking vector is turned in the direction of the jump vector. Marking delay too long If the selected marking delay is too long, there are no visible negative results. However, the marking time is increased. Polygon delay too short
Polygon delay too short
Fig. 4-103
The following marking command in a polyline is already started although the mirrors have not yet reached the end of the vector for the current marking command. As a result, the corners of the polyline are rounded off.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Laser menu
4-127
Polygon delay too long
Polygon delay too long
Fig. 4-104
In case the polygon delay is too long, the mirrors move too slowly or they stop altogether between the marking commands. This causes burn-ins at each vector point.
4-128
Laser menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
> Laser parameters > Card Width In this dialog window all values for the width of the laser parameter selected in the left-hand directory window are set. This function is not available:
Administrate laser parameters
•
with sequence parameters "Sequence"),
•
with local parameters which are defined as a reference to global parameters (also refer to the Section "Administrate").
(also refer
to
the Section
All laser marking systems
"Laser parameters Width" dialog window
Fig. 4-105
Two options for changing the track width are also available: •
Wobbling
•
Parallel lines
Option Simple The laser scans the geometry with this laser parameter once. The width achieved on the workpiece depends on the laser parameters and the material properties of the workpiece (refer to the Section "Main parameter"). In the CAD, these geometries are represented using the line thickness which is set in the main parameters under "Track width". Note This image can be switched on and off for zoomed images under ""Only thin lines".
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Laser menu
4-129
Option Wobbling The laser scans the geometry with this laser parameter in cycloid form. The width which occurs depends on the entered values for width and the following distance. In the CAD, these geometries are displayed by a line thickness of the corresponding width. Width Entry of the width of the wobbled geometry in millimeters. The greater the set width, the slower the marking process. Sequence Entry of the sequence of two neighboring wobble cycles. The smaller the value, the closer the individual cycles are, the slower the process will be. Effective values for the sequence are in the range of the "Track width" set in the main parameters. Arc resolution During output the wobble arcs are converted to vector lines. The arc resolution entered here defines in degrees how many lines are created (e.g. an arc resolution of 45 degrees produces eight lines). Effective velocity This value refers to the actual marking velocity of the respective geometries. It is lower than the laser velocity defined in the main parameters, as the path through the wobble arc (cycloid) is much longer. The value serves only for information purposes and cannot be changed. Option Parallel lines The laser scans the geometry with this laser parameter several times with an offset (in regular equidistants arranged around the geometry). The width which occurs depends on the entered values for width. In the CAD editor this geometry is displayed by a line thickness of the corresponding width. The width of an individual line which is used as a basis is the defined value of the track width contained in the "Main parameter" submenu (refer to the "Main parameter" Section). As this value depends on the physical properties of the laser and the interaction with the processed material, it must be determined experimentally. The area filling value and the distance between the individual lines are calculated.
4-130
Laser menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Width Setting of the required width of the geometry on the workpiece in millimeters. Number Setting of the number of parallel lines. Area filling Setting of the degree of covering with the parallel lines. An area filling of below 100% results in spaces between the individual parallel geometries, a value greater than 100% to the respective cover. The number and distance of the individual lines is calculated depending on the track width of the individual line (refer to the Section "Main parameter"), the required width and the covering. Distance Here the distance of the parallel lines to one another is set. If the distance value is the same as the track width set in the main parameters, covering is 100%. The covering and the number of the individual lines is calculated depending on the track width of the individual line, the required width and the distance.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Laser menu
4-131
> Laser parameters > Card Dotted line This dialog window is used to set the type of dotted line of the geometric elements to which this laser parameter is allocated. The dashed lines appear both in the CAD as well as on the workpiece. Administrate laser parameters
All laser marking systems
"Laser parameters Dotted line" dialog window
Fig. 4-106
Option Continuous lines Here only continuous lines without dots are output. Option x Pattern Here dotted lines are output. The dotted line can be created from up to six patterns. Each individual pattern is defined by the entered length of a gap and a line in millimeters. Due to the combination of different patterns different dotted lines can be defined. Select "Continuous to end" The last line of the pattern is continued through to the end to prevent a gap at the end of the line.
4-132
Laser menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Select "Continuous" With rectangles and polylines the pattern is continuous around the corners. Select "Averaging" The dotted line is distributed along the line (circle, arc of a circle etc.) that the line starts with the half first dot and also ends with a half first dot. The pattern is then stretched or flattened slightly. The lines therefore always look symmetrical, with circles there is no seam visible in the pattern. With rectangles or polylines dots always appear at the corners, therefore two first half dots always meet.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Laser menu
4-133
> Laser parameters > Card Sequence In this dialog window existing parameters can be arranged in sequence. These are used during output on the workpiece in the sequence defined here and with the set number of repetitions. If the sequences are allocated to bitmaps, the gray level depth of the bitmap object is converted so that it corresponds to the number of laser parameters contained in the sequence (for example if 16 laser parameters are contained in the sequence, the bitmap is converted to a 16 gray level bitmap). The first parameter within the sequence lasers the darkest, the last parameter the lightest points (gray level). Each pixel of the bitmap is lasered with the laser parameters corresponding to its gray level. The setting options in the submenus "Main parameter", "Intern", "Width" and "Dotted line" are disabled, as these values only apply to the original parameters and not for sequences. Only the color in the submenu "Main parameter" can be adjusted. Administrate laser parameters
All laser marking systems
"Laser parameters Sequence" dialog window
Fig. 4-107
Available parameters Here all the individual parameters which occur "In this project" are contained which can be selected for the sequence.
4-134
Laser menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Parameters used Here the individual parameters used in this sequence are listed, the number of repetitions is given in brackets at the end of the name. Button --> Adds the current parameter of "Available parameters" to the sequence with the set repetitions given in "Number". Button Marking field
In this dialog window all settings are performed for administration of the marking field and for segmentation.
Marking field, optic, segment
Card Marking field, optic
"Marking field, optic, segment" dialog window
Fig. 4-108
Group field Representation Here the optical segmenting settings are shown. Select "Center lines visible" This is a setting to define whether center lines of dashes and dots appear in the marking field to facilitate orientation. Select "Show segmentation" The set segmentation areas are displayed as dotted lines.
4-136
Laser menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Select "Display segment numbers" The set segmentation areas are displayed as segment numbers. The sequence of these numbers and therefore the sequence of the output can be changed with "Laser" > "Sort Segments". Group field Units The unit for entries can be selected either as "inch" or "millimeters". Group field Optics If the laser hardware permits, the employed laser optics can be set here. The size of the marking field changes depending on the selected optics. Group field Precision This is where the general precision of the output can be set. The set value states the maximum deviation from the set geometry. Circles, ellipses, circle arcs must be converted during the marking process into polygon lines. A mathematically correct circle with a center and radius as defined in CAD is converted into a polygon in the marking process. The precision parameter states how large the maximum deviation to the ideal circle can be. In contrast to the general precision defined here, the context menu (right mouse button, "Properties") can be used to enter values which are only valid for this element on the "Laser" card, for example to apply a very fine resolution to a special circle (see Fig. 4-99). Minimum angle Irrespective of the precision defined in the marking program the value for circles/arcs of circles is not below the set minimum angle, for example to avoid large amounts of data. Maximum angle Irrespective of the precision defined in the marking program the set maximum angle for circles/arcs of circles is not exceeded. An entry of "90 degrees" therefore ensures that even very small circles are displayed with at least four lines.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Laser menu
4-137
Modify circle properties
"Modify circle properties" dialog window
Fig. 4-109
Marking field > Segmented If the laser hardware permits, the marking field can be divided into various segments which are individually marked. This can serve: •
To process larger marking fields than is possible with the optics
•
Implementing radial marking
The size of the individual segment areas can be specified here. There are the following categories:
4-138
•
Unsegmented
•
Horizontal/vertical
•
Unbonded rectangles
•
Cylindric segmented
•
3D surface
Laser menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Cards Segmented – Unsegmented No segmentation takes place here. The marking field defined by the optics is marked as a whole without segmenting. Marking field, optic, segment
Segmentation, Unsegmented dialog window
Fig. 4-110
Group field Multihead The Multihead graphics editor is activated in the "Multihead" group field. Master Head A or B can be defined as master. Drawings are made in the white marking field of the master. The marking field of the other head is on a gray background (refer to Section 1.5 "User interface of CAD with Multihead"). Offset The field next to the marking field can be shifted with the offset. Note The Multihead function can only be activated if it is installed. Contact the TRUMPF branch office in your country.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Laser menu
4-139
Cards Segmented – Horizontal/vertical Segmentation is performed by horizontal/vertical partition of the marking field. Marking field, optic, segment
"Marking field, optic, segment" dialog window
Fig. 4-111
Group field Segments Marking field width If the required marking field is larger than defined by the optics, the current width can be entered. Marking field height If the required marking field is larger than defined by the optics, the current height can be entered. Horizontal segmentation Display of the horizontal segmentation limits can be modified (values separated with comma or semicolon). The function "horizontal number" is also adapted accordingly.
4-140
Laser menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Horizontal number The display of the horizontal number of the segmentation areas can be modified. The function "horizontal segmentation" is modified accordingly so that the segment areas are regularly distributed in the marking field. Vertical segmentation with Display of the vertical segmentation limits can be modified (values separated with comma or semicolon). The function "Vertical number" is also adapted accordingly. Vertical number The display of the vertical number of the segmentation areas can be modified. The function "Vertical segmentation" is modified accordingly so that the segment areas are regularly distributed in the marking field. Number Number of calculated segments. Field No. Segment number to be assigned a relative Z height. Z height Relative Z displacement to be assigned to the selected segment. Group field Sequence This is where the sequence of the segment output is defined. – Start point The first output segment is at the bottom left, bottom right, top left or top right. – Direction Option horizontal Starting from the first segment, output is continued horizontally. Option vertical Starting from the first segment, output is continued vertically. Select "Alternating" The individual lines (horizontal direction) or columns (vertical direction) are output with an alternating direction.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Laser menu
4-141
Button Establish segment limits interactively The set segmentation can be changed interactively. The dialog window is closed, the segment limits are displayed as dashes and can be changed when the mouse pointer is placed on them. This setting is confirmed by clicking the right mouse button or the key and cancelled with or any menu item selection. Note This function can be used in particular to correct the segmentation so that as little geometry as possible is cut and therefore ends in different segments. Cards Segmented – Unbonded rectangle Segmentation is performed freely as defined rectangles (parts of the marking field). Overlapping is possible. Marking field, optic, segment
"Marking field, optic, segment" dialog window
Fig. 4-112
Marking field size If the required marking field is larger than defined by the optics, the current size can be entered.
4-142
Laser menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Number of fields Entry of the number of freely definable segmentation areas within the marking field. Field No. Selection of the number of the field for which limits are to be defined. Z height Relative Z displacement to be assigned to the selected segment. Left, Right, Top, Bottom Definition of the limits of the currently selected field. Overlapping within the marking field is possible. Button Establish segment limits interactively The set segmentation can be changed interactively. The dialog window is closed, the segment limits are displayed as dashes and can be changed by dragging with the mouse when the mouse pointer is placed on them. This setting is confirmed by clicking the right mouse button or the key and cancelled with or any menu item selection. Note This function can be used in particular to correct the segmentation so that as little geometry as possible is cut and therefore ends in different segments.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Laser menu
4-143
Cards Segmented – Cylindric Segmented If the laser hardware permits, a rotating cylinder can be marked in individual steps. The current values of the cylinder are entered here. Marking field, optic, segment
"Marking field, optic, segment" dialog window
Fig. 4-113
Diameter Entry of the cylinder diameter. The rolled circumference together with the length results in the overall area of the marking field. Length Entry of the cylinder length. The length together with the rolled circumference results in the overall surface of the marking field. Rotation steps Entry of the rotation steps of the cylinder in degrees. The unrolled part circumference together with the length results in the overall area of the segmentation field. For example if 300 is entered, the cylinder is marked in 12 segments.
4-144
Laser menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Group field Cylinder position Definition of whether the cylinder is arranged horizontally or vertically in order to prepare the geometry accordingly. Group field Direction of rotation Definition whether the cylinder is rotated to the left or right. Select "Equalizing" The geometry is equalized so that it is adapted to the curve of the cylinder. Equalizing precision This value in drawing units (mm or inch) determines with which precision the geometry is to be equalized. Defocusing value This value in drawing units (mm or inch) states how far defocusing is in front of the actual processing level of the laser. With cylinder segmentation of, for example, 45 degrees, eight segment areas are created. These segment files create an octagon in cross-section across the cylinder, and the corner points are positioned exactly on the surface. Therefore when viewed from above, the exposure plane (segment area) is formed within the cylinder. The defocus value is the center between the exposure plane and the surface of the cylinder. To ensure that marking is performed optimally, the exposure distance on the exposure plane (segment level) and in the laser parameter the defocus value must be set to the value calculated here. The focus is positioned exactly in the center between the exposure plane and cylinder surface so that the applied force is optimal due to the depth of focus.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Defocus with focus
Fig. 4-114
Laser menu
4-145
Working distance This value in drawing units (mm or inch) states how far the maximum elevation of the cylinder section is in front of the actual processing plane of the laser. This is, viewed from above, the height from the exposure plane (segment plane) and the surface of the cylinder (corresponds to the double defocus value, see above). Settlement amplitude X/Y Depending on the setting shows the size of all settlements in the X and Y direction in the predefined units. Button Establish segment limits interactively The set segmentation can be changed interactively. The dialog window is closed, the segment boundaries are displayed in dashes and can be changed by pulling them with the mouse after positioning the mouse pointer on them. The setting is confirmed by the right mouse button or the key. The setting is discarded with the key or by selecting a menu. Note This function can be used in particular to correct the segmentations in order to minimize the number of geometries which are cut and hence divided into different segments.
4-146
Laser menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Cards Segmented – 3D Surface (option) If the laser hardware permits, any 3D Surface can be marked in individual steps. The required settings are performed in this dialog window. Marking field, optic, segmented
"Marking field, optic, segment" dialog window
Fig. 4-115
Button Read in marking area file Selection of the required file with the 3D area files in XML format. Steps in Z direction This value states the number of the individual division steps in the Z direction. A separate output is performed for each step. Equalizing precision This value in drawing units (mm or inch) states with which precision the geometry is equalized.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Laser menu
4-147
7.5
> Sort
All objects with the same laser parameter are combined for output on the laser marking system. In this submenu the sequence can be sorted in which the individual laser parameters are processed. This can be useful to optimize time-intensive settings on the laser hardware. Sort objects
"Sort objects" dialog window
Fig. 4-116
Option Sort all objects All objects of the drawing are sorted. Option Sort marked objects only Only the marked objects in the drawing are sorted. Option Increasing with laser output The individual laser parameters are sorted according to increasing laser output.
4-148
Laser menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Option Decreasing with laser output The individual laser parameters are sorted according to decreasing laser output. Option Not according to laser output The laser output does not play a role in sorting. Option Increasing with focussing The individual laser parameters are sorted according to increasing focussing. Option Decreasing with focussing The individual laser parameters are sorted according to decreasing focussing. Option Not according to focussing Focussing does not play a role in sorting. Option Increasing with Z offset The individual laser parameters are sorted according to an increasing Z offset value. Option Decreasing with Z offset The individual laser parameters are sorted according to a decreasing Z offset value. Option Not according to Z offset The Z offset value does not play a role in sorting. Option Priority low The corresponding property has a lower priority during output, i.e. sorting is first performed in accordance with the other features. Sorting is performed within the created output group according to this feature only in the end. Option Priority medium The corresponding property has a medium priority during output, i.e. sorting is first performed in accordance with the property with the highest priority. Then sorting is performed within the created output group according to this property.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Laser menu
4-149
Option Priority high The corresponding property has a high priority during output, i.e. sorting is first performed in accordance with this property. Then sorting is performed within the created output group according to other properties. Select "According to shortest path" During output the objects are optimized according to the shortest path. The other criteria are then taken into account accordingly. Select "Also sort group contents" Pre-defined groups (also called "Library elements" or "Blocks") can be either sorted with their individual elements or not taken into account during sorting, if they are already optimized. Button "Sort interactively" The sorting sequence appears marked with small numbers on the respective object. These numbers can be shifted on the object for more clarity. The automatically suggested sequence can be recompiled by clicking the individual objects with the mouse. To this purpose hold down the key and touch the required object with the mouse pointer. As soon as the mouse pointer is on the object, the corresponding sorting number jumps to the mouse pointer. When the key is released, the position remains saved. This action is confirmed by the right mouse button or the key, it is cancelled with the key or any menu selection.
4-150
Laser menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
7.6
> Generate object matrix
In this submenu it is possible to make multiple chessboard-like copies of objects. The contained variables can be copied and renamed, also if the values differ. In case of a variable "Read from file" the parameter variables "Start value" and "Step width" are adjusted accordingly (refer to Section 7.7 "> Variables"). Generate matrix of objects
"Generate matrix of objects" dialog window
Fig. 4-117
Group field Parameter Distance horizontal The distance of object group to object group in X direction (in millimeters). At first the outer limitation in X direction of all objects is displayed. Distance vertical The distance of object group to object group in Y direction (in millimeters). At first the outer limitation in Y direction of all objects is displayed.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Laser menu
4-151
Number horizontal Number of object groups in X direction. Number vertical Number of object groups in Y direction. Select "Center Objects" The object groups are positioned in center from the center of the drawing surface. Group field Choose variables which have to be counted up In this selection list it is possible to mark the variables which are counted up in the objects when copying them. Multiple selection is possible. Group field Sorting Option First row, then column The object groups are sorted in this order. Option First column, then row The object groups are sorted in this order. Option First row, then column, then column up/down alternate The object groups are sorted in this order. Option First column, then row, then row left/right alternate The object groups are sorted in this order.
4-152
Laser menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
7.7
> Variables
Variables can be defined in this submenu which are used in a drawing project in order to insert current data during execution of the marking program with the laser. The menu changes in accordance with the selected data origin. Administrate list of variables
The variables and their properties are saved in the drawing.
"Administrate variable list" dialog window
Fig. 4-118
Group field Properties of Number Variable list field Lists already defined variables. Button New variable Creates a new variable. Button Remove variable Deletes an existing and selected variable. Data origin Defines the data source from where the variables are given their values. Interactively During execution of the marking program a prompt for the variable text appears in a dialog box.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Laser menu
4-153
From file During execution of the marking program the variable text is read out from a file. Here the file name must be given with the path, the line number of the file at which the first variable value changes and the step for determining the next value (Start value: 10, step: 2 therefore means: The variable values are in the lines: 10, 12, 14, 16 etc.). Also determines the behavior when the final value is reached. COM object When the marking program is executed, the variable text from a COM object is made available. The COM object is identified by the 'Modulname.Klassenname' or by '{ID-Number}'. The COM object must have the interface "IVariableManager" from 'VariableManager.tlb'. The interface comprises two functions: •
HRESULT InitializeVariable(BSTR Identifier,[out,retval]BSTR* NewVal) – Supplies the first value of the variable identifier as a string.
•
HRESULT SetNextValue(BSTR Identifier, BSTR LastVal, [out,retval]BSTR* NewVal) – Supplies the next value of the variable identifier as a string.
The parameter "LastVal" contains the last value of the variables.
4-154
Laser menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Serial number The variable text is issued as serial number during the execution of the marking program. The initial value, the increment from one serial number to the next one, the final value and the procedure after reaching the final value are defined. Furthermore several objects can be linked in a marking file with a serial number variable ("Increment within project / marking file" checkbox). Objects obtain the following values with only one defined variable.
Four text fields with one variable
Fig. 4-119
Code word During execution of the marking program the variable text of constants, a code word or a previously created variable is generated. In this case several objects (code words, constants, variables) are combined. The date and time can for example be used as code words. The required data origin can be selected from the code word list and inserted into the complete text with "OK". The selected code words then accumulate (in curved brackets). Formatting can be changed there individually.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Laser menu
4-155
Example: Define variable with code word "modulo"
"Administrate variable list" dialog window
Fig. 4-120
¾ Open submenu "Variables". ¾ Click button "New variable". Dialog window "Define new variable" opens. ¾ Type the name of the variable in the text field: e.g."Test". ¾ Select the entry "Code word" for the variable "Test" from the drop-down list field "Data origin". ¾ Select e.g. "modulo10" in the drop-down list field "Code word" and click button "Paste". "modulo10@(varname)" appears in the text field "Complete text". ¾ Select the variable, e.g. "Time" according to the same procedure. ¾ In text field "Complete text" replace the term "varname" by the variable "Time". ¾ Confirm all entries with "OK".
4-156
Laser menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Function call When the marking program is executed, the variable text from a program function is made available. First the name of the DLL with the path must be given, then the function name inside the DLL. The declaration of the function must have the following form: •
'int CALLBACK [Functionname](wchar_t*, wchar_t*,int*)';
Example: •
int CALLBACK SetVariableValue(BSTR VariableName,BSTR buffer,int* maxSize);
The parameter "VariableName" contains the identifier of the variables. "buffer" supplies the memory to accommodate the values of the variables as a string. "maxSize" is the maximum length of the string which the buffer can accommodate. If "maxSize" is too small, "maxSize" must be set to the necessary size and the return value of the function is set to 0. Then a second call occurs with a correspondingly large "buffer". If the variable value is set successfully, the return value of the function states the number of the copied characters. "VariableName" and "buffer" are allocated by LaserCAD and also released once more. External source During execution of the marking program the variable text is generated from a predefined external source.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Laser menu
4-157
7.8
> Hatch styles
Hatch styles can be defined in this submenu which can be assigned to drawing elements with closed edges from the "Draw" menu (refer to Section 6.10 "> Hatching") or from the context menu (refer to Section 2.2 "Change objects" > "Context menu"). Administrate hatching
"Administrate hatching" dialog window
Fig. 4-121
Option Lines Hatching is performed with lines. Option Equidistant Hatching is performed with equidistants. Option Spirals The hatching is spiral-shaped. Line spacing Setting of the spacing of the hatching lines from one another. Margin distance Setting of the distance of the hatching from the edging. Shading angle Setting of the angle at which the hatching lines are entered.
4-158
Laser menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Angle increment If the number of hatchings (see below) is greater than "1", a setting can be made here at which angle difference the following hatching(s) are entered. Example: Angle increment: 90 and number of hatchings: 2 creates chessboard hatching. Number of hatchings Entry of the number of separate hatchings which can be turned or inserted by the value of the angle increment. Select "Alternating" The individual hatchings are inserted alternately for path optimization in each case. Select "Line by line" The individual hatching lines are marked line by line over the whole marking field. If this option is not activated, each object is marked one after the other. Button New Defining a new hatching style. The entered name appears in the display area and can be modified as described. Button Delete Deletes the currently selected hatching style in the left display window. Button Save Saves the currently selected hatching style in the left display window. This is available for following projects.
7.9
> Font Editor
The Font Editor is a separate program section and is described in more detail in Section 8 "Font Editor".
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Laser menu
4-159
7.10 > Sort segments When this function is activated, the current sorting sequence of the segments of the marking field defined previously in the submenu "Marking field" > "Segmented" (also refer to the Section 7.4 "Laser menu" > "Marking field") appears. The sequence is depicted by numbers in the center of the respective segment. The respective sequence can be changed by clicking the individual segments with the mouse. This action is confirmed by clicking with the right mouse button or the key, it is cancelled with the key or any menu selection.
Numbering of the sorted segments
4-160
Laser menu
Fig. 4-122
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
7.11 > Project data In this submenu changes to the marking program can be logged. Project data
"Projectdata" dialog window
Fig. 4-123
Author Name of the project author. Created on Date of creation of the project which is automatically taken from the system. Title A project title can be given. Button New change The author and the commentary of a new modification of the program can be entered.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Laser menu
4-161
Project change information
"Project change information" dialog window
Fig. 4-124
Time window Here the date and time of the changes made with "New change" are defined.
7.12 > Pilot laser on/off The pilot laser option is described in Chapter 2. The pilot laser can directly be switched on or off from CAD.
7.13 > Marking During the step > Marking laser radiation is emitted from the lens! WARNING
Laser radiation can burn your skin and cause permanent damage to your eyes. ¾
If the laser protection cover is either open or missing, wear laser protection goggles with glasses which are suitable for the wavelength of the laser radiation.
¾
Never put your hand between the lens and the workpiece.
¾
Never look into the lens.
Initiates a quick output of the existing drawing to the marking device for test purposes. If no object has been selected in the drawing, the entire drawing is marked. If objects have been selected, only these are output.
4-162
Laser menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
7.14 > Navigator The navigator option is described in Chapter 2. The navigator helps the operator to promptly find, adjust, and optimize the appropriate laser parameters for the marking task.
7.15 > Focus test Press the "Focus test" icon and the following "Focus test" dialog window opens. The standard values are displayed in the fields "Number of values" and "Max/Min value" and visualized in the CAD. The "Max/Min value" depends on the laser type.
Focus test dialog window
Fig. 4-125
Click "Preview" and mark the preview in the CAD with a mouse click. Then a value will be displayed in the "Optimal focus" field. Confirm the value with "OK". Also confirm the following message with "Yes":
Focus test message
Fig. 4-126
The optimal focus of the Z axis is now set. The Z_offset can be set alike.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Laser menu
4-163
7.16 > Slow hatch as area This function can be set according to Section 9 "Menu Extras > Options > Card Objects – Hatching" (also refer to page 4-225). After clicking the icon, you can display a hatched area as an area. This procedure is described in Chapter 2, Section 3.7 FastBitmapMarking.
4-164
Laser menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
8.
Font Editor
This submenu opens the separate Font Editor program Section in which fonts are selected, defined and modified. The Font Editor permits new definition of fonts or reading in of existing TrueType fonts. The fonts generated in this way are given special parameters and can then be used for laser marking. If a font is unavailable in the current system, a dialog window opens and indicates the font not found. Then you are requested to select another font. Structure of the user interface
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
The user interface of the Font Editor comprises the menu bar (1), the tool bar (2), the drawing field (3), the list field for font selection (4) and an area with the drawing properties (5).
Font Editor
4-165
1 Menu bar
4 List field
2 Tool bar
5 Drawing properties
3 Drawing field "Font Editor" dialog window
4-166
Font Editor
Fig. 4-127
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Menu bar
The pull-down menus can be opened from the menu bar and used to manage work with the CAD and control the drawing. The following menus are provided: •
File
•
Edit
•
View
•
Font
•
? (Help)
These menus are available for accessing all functions of the Font Editor. Some of these functions can also be activated with buttons from the tool bar. The menu functions are activated either with the mouse or by using the keyboard, as described for the CAD user interface (also refer to Section 1.4 "User interface for CAD"). Tool bar
The tool bar provides fast access to various file operations (e.g. "open" and "save") and functions for creating and editing drawings.
Tool bar
Fig. 4-128
Font selection
The left list field displays the entire defined range of the selected font with its Unicode number. A character for editing can be selected and placed in the drawing field by double-clicking.
Font display
In the center area of this window the font selected on the left is displayed (if applicable with the filling lines). It can be modified here. New fonts are also created in the drawing field.
Properties and actions
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
On the right either the properties of the character or font or entry fields for creating and modifying characters are located (so-called actions).
Font Editor
4-167
8.1
File menu
Pull-down file menu
Fig. 4-129
> New Serves to create a new font. The required characters must then be defined. A dialog window appears in which the properties of the font can be defined (refer to Section 8.3 "View menu" > "Properties of the font").
4-168
Font Editor
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Properties of the font
"Properties of the font" dialog window
Fig. 4-130
> Open For opening a new font.
Open
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Open file dialog window
Fig. 4-131
Font Editor
4-169
Fonts are saved as laserfont files (file name extension: '.lfn'). All laserfont files are automatically saved in a folder which can be defined in the registration database. > Import TXF file Imports a TXF font. This can be saved in TruTops Mark® format '.lfn' and is then available to the TruTops Mark® program package. Open
Import TXF file dialog window
4-170
Font Editor
Fig. 4-132
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Import font
Proceed as follows: ¾ In the Font Editor open the required font and save it in *.TXF format. ¾ Copy the file to disk or to a network drive if available. ¾ Now you can import the font in the Font Editor with the "Import TXF file" function. ¾ Then save the font under C:\TruMark\Fonts\Filename.vlf. After import, individual characters can be modified as described below. Font size Defines the size of the character set. The value set here states the height of the font box in millimeters. The individual characters are drawn in this font box. The respective width is variable. The height set here should, however not be exceeded, to prevent the characters touching or overlapping. Note In TruTops Mark® the marking can be enlarged or reduced as required. This also affects the filling lines and can cause unwanted effects during marking (overlapping or gaps in the filling). It is better for each required character size to create a separate font, if this is to be available in filled form. Spacing Sets the spacing between the individual characters. Select "Use OemToAnsi" Depending on the definition of the fonts, it can be useful to switch the OemToAnsi conversion table on or off, for example for special characters. > Import TrueType Imports a TrueType font. The TrueType font is extended by other necessary definitions which are necessary for laser output and which can then be saved in TruTops Mark® format ('.lfn').
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Font Editor
4-171
After import individual characters can be modified. Import TrueType font
"Import TTF" dialog window
Fig. 4-133
Font selection list field Permits the selection of a font from all TrueType fonts Select "Bold/Italic" Setting of the font style of the selected font. Select "Kerning" Permits the setting of a proportional font. In this case the distance between the characters is variable between the respective character spacings (kerning). Size Setting of the size of the selected font. The value set here states the height of the font box in millimeters. The individual characters are drawn in this font box. The respective width is variable. The height set here should not be exceeded, to prevent the characters touching or overlapping.
4-172
Font Editor
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Note In TruTops Mark® the marking can be enlarged or reduced as required. This also affects the filling lines and can cause unwanted effects during marking (overlapping or gaps in the filling). It is better for each required character size to create a separate font, if this is to be available in filled form. Resolution The roundings (splines) of the true type fonts are defined with polygons (vectors). Here, the exactness of the resolution is defined. The inputted value in millimeters determines the maxi¬mum deviation of the polygon approximation from the original splines. If the resolution is too high, the laser marking is slowed down and no longer homogeneous due to too many single vectors. Select "Contour" This function sets whether the outer contour of the true type is part of the character or whether it is only represented by the filling. Distance Defines the distances of the generated contour inwards towards to the original true type border in millimeters. This distance is used to take into account the width of a laser line. Select "Hatching" Determines whether the selected true type font is to have a filling.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Font Editor
4-173
Option Line filling The filling is made with lines.
Line filling
4-174
Font Editor
Fig. 4-134
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Option Equidistant The filling is made with equidistants of the edge which are drawn based on the edge.
Equidistants
Fig. 4-135
Filling Lines spacing The filling lines spacing depends on the width of a laser line on the workpiece and should be selected so that there is no noteworthy overlapping, but also no gaps. It can be modified later for individual characters. Filling lines angle The filling lines angle defines the predefined angle of the filling lines during line filling. It can be modified later for individual characters.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Font Editor
4-175
Filling margin distance The filling margin distance determines how far from the outside contour the individual filling lines end to take the width of the laser line into account and to prevent "overburning" of the outside contour. It can be modified later for individual characters. Select "Alternating filling lines" Alternating filling lines can be set as filling lines for path optimization. Select "Margin prior to filling" The margin is drawn before the filling. > Save Saves and registers the edited laser font. If no target folder and name are defined, this is asked for here. A special folder is preset if this is stated in the registration database. As a file name extension 'lfn' (for laser font) is suggested. > Save as Saves the edited laser font under a special name. This is where the target directory and the name is defined. A special folder is preset if this is stated in the registration database. As a file name extension 'lfn' (for laser font) is suggested.
4-176
Font Editor
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
> Registered fonts Opens a dialog window in which previously registered, i.e. saved fonts are shown. Fonts can be opened or deregistered for subsequent editing. Registered fonts
"Registered fonts" dialog window
Using fonts on another laser
Fig. 4-136
If you wish to use new or modified fonts on another laser, the following steps must be performed: ¾ Save the new font on the disk and copy these into the target laser in the folder C:\TruMark\Fonts\Fontname.vlf. ¾ Register the font by opening and then saving in the Font Editor.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Font Editor
4-177
> Print fonts This opens the print dialog of the Font Editor where the currently selected font (displayed in the font field) can be printed.
Print section
"Print section" dialog window
Fig. 4-137
Option Entire drawing, format filling The drawing, i.e. the current font, is depicted on the paper in the most format filling manner. The necessary scale is displayed under "Scale 1:xxx". Option Current picture section, format filling The set picture section is printed so that the format is filled. The page aspect ratio is adapted so that no area of the picture section is omitted. The printed picture section can therefore be larger than shown in the drawing field. Note The selection "Current picture section, format filling" refers to the section shown in the dialog for "Print section". At the beginning this section is identical to the current view of the drawing. After a zoom action within the dialog, however, the section shown in the dialog changes.
4-178
Font Editor
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Option Fixed scale Here a fixed scale can be entered. A frame appears on the drawing on the screen which symbolizes the paper size. This frame can be picked and moved as required on the drawing in order to print any section of the drawing in the set scale. Paper size Shows the currently set paper size in "Printer setup" on which the views and scale calculations in this dialog are based. Button Printer setup Opens the print dialog of your printer in which settings can be made. Decisive in this case is the set paper size and the format (portrait/landscape). Number Defines the number of copies required. Representation window In the left-hand side of this dialog there is a representation window which also permits interactive actions. It serves to display and influence the current print area. The representation of the drawing (or the drawing section) and the print area (as frame) can be influenced by three functions. Button Overview The entire drawing is shown in the window. The print area can be moved on the drawing by pressing within the marked edging. Button Paper The paper area is shown. The print area can be moved with the mouse pointer in the drawing as required. Button Zoom Any section of the drawing can be selected by pulling a rectangle with the mouse pointer in the image window. The print area can then be moved with the mouse pointer in the drawing as required.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Font Editor
4-179
Button Print Starts printing. > Print The active font should be printed. This opens the print dialog of your printer. If the printable area is smaller than the page size of the complete character set, the print-out is spread over several pages (from left to right, from top to bottom). When these pages are put together, they feature the entire character set. The current division of the sheet on the print pages can be viewed with the "Page preview" menu item. > Page preview Opens the page preview which shows how the drawing is output on the printer. You open an image in which you can zoom and in the case of several print pages scroll through the individual pages. > Printer setup Opens the setup dialog of your printer in which various print settings are made, depending on the installed printer.
4-180
Font Editor
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
8.2
Edit menu
Pull-down edit menu
Fig. 4-138
> Undo The last ten actions can be undone. > Cut Marked sections of the current drawing can be cut out and moved to the clipboard. They can be reinserted when a new character is created. This function is useful for creating similar characters. > Copy Marked sections of the current character can be copied and moved to the clipboard. They can be reinserted when a new character is created. This function is useful for creating similar characters. > Paste CAD objects on the clipboard can be inserted into the text box of the current character. These can be parts of a similar character which have been pasted to the clipboard with "Edit" > "Copy/Cut". With very complex characters it can also be objects which are created with the CAD.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Font Editor
4-181
8.3
View menu
Pull-down view menu
Fig. 4-139
> Tool bar Switches the display of the tool bar on and off. > Status line Switches the display of the status line at the bottom of the screen on and off.
Status line
4-182
Font Editor
Fig. 4-140
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
> Select section Activates the zoom function. It is then possible to open a rectangle with the mouse pointer in the character field which defines the zoom area. > Whole character When this function is selected, the entire font box is displayed. > Properties of the font Opens a dialog window in which the properties of the selected font can be displayed and modified. Properties of the font
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
"Properties of the font" dialog window
Fig. 4-141
Font Editor
4-183
Short name Name of the character set. Description Permits the entry of a description of the font. This can afterwards be viewed again with the properties of the character set. Group field Dimensions Select "Fixed character spacing" Defines whether the character spacing varies (proportional font) or whether it should be output with fixed spacing. If proportional font is selected, it can be determined whether this character set should be set to a fixed character spacing. Font size Defines the size of the character set. The value set here states the height of the font box in millimeters. The individual characters are drawn in this font box. The respective width is variable. The height set here should, however, not be exceeded, to prevent the characters touching or overlapping. Note ® In TruTops Mark the marking can be enlarged or reduced as required. This also affects the filling lines and can cause unwanted effects during marking (overlapping or gaps in the filling). It is better for each required character size to create a separate font, if this is to be available in filled form. Baseline height Stipulates the position of the baseline from the bottom edge of the font box in millimeters. The baseline is depicted as a horizontal line and is the lower limit for all characters without descender. If subsequently when working in TruTops Mark® the reference point of the text is set to this baseline, the text can be placed on a set line without problems. Width With non-proportional character sets stipulates the character spacing. Left margin With non-proportional character sets stipulates the left margin next to the character.
4-184
Font Editor
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Right margin With non-proportional character sets stipulates the right margin next to the character. Ascender Stipulates the position of a dashed orientation line for the ascender (presetting: position of the cross-line on the large "T"). X height Stipulates the position of a dotted orientation line for the height of the small characters (presetting: length of the top edge of the small "x"). Descender Stipulates the position of a dotted orientation line for the descender of characters (presetting: length of the bottom edge of the small "j"). Group field Grid Horizontal Setting of the horizontal grid dimension for drawing a new character. If the grid is activated, it is displayed as gray points in the font box, the ends of lines jump to these points. The resolution of the characters can also be influenced. Vertical Setting of the vertical grid dimension for drawing a new character. If the grid is activated, it is displayed as gray points in the font box, line ends jump to these points. The resolution of the characters can therefore be influenced by this grid setting. Distance from left If the character spacing should not be within the grid dimension on the left, a separate value can be entered here. The distance to the bottom is automatically selected so that the grid runs through the baseline.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Font Editor
4-185
Standard font The set character appears if a character is requested which is not defined in this character set. The standard character can be entered or defined with its Unicode number (0x41). Background font The set character appears as a background if a new character is to be created. Similarities or width/height ratios can be adjusted. The background character can be entered or defined with its Unicode number (0x41). Group field Scaling Select "Keep page aspect ration" Stipulates whether the past aspect ratio will be kept during drawing. X factor With previously defined character sets a factor can be given for the X expansion. Width With previously defined character sets a standard value can be given for the width. Y factor With previously defined character sets a factor can be given for the Y expansion. Height With previously defined character sets a standard value can be given for the height.
4-186
Font Editor
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
8.4
Font menu
Font menu
Fig. 4-142
> Mark Permits changes to a selected character with geometric modifications. The possible actions appear in the right-hand window of the user interface.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Font Editor
4-187
Action marking
If a mouse pointer is positioned above a markable object, it changes shape. The respective object is activated by clicking with the left mouse button – it is then in a dotted frame.
Action marking
Fig. 4-143
If whole parts of the drawing are to be activated, a frame can be opened (press left mouse button, hold down, move, release). All objects which are contained completely within the frame are then marked. If several such marking actions are to be combined, the marking actions can be accumulated before marking by holding down the or key. During a new marking operation the previously marked objects remain active, the new ones are added. Button Delete marked objects The marked objects are deleted. Button Mark all objects All objects of the selected character are automatically marked to modify the whole character.
4-188
Font Editor
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
With the aid of the buttons at the top the following modifications can be made to the marked objects.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
•
Drag
•
Rotate
•
Scale
Font Editor
4-189
Drag The marked lines of the selected character are shifted.
Action drag
First click one point of the selected objects and then click any other shifting point. The points are aligned and define the shift. It is useful to activate the jump function.
Action drag
Fig. 4-144
Shifting of the objects can also be performed by entering the coordinates in the input fields "Horizontal" and "Vertical". The reference point of the coordinates is the left-hand bottom corner of the font box. Select "Copy" A copy of the selected objects is created and shifted, the original objects are retained.
4-190
Font Editor
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Rotate The selected objects are rotated.
Action rotate
First click a point around which the selected objects are to be turned. Then click two other points which define the rotation (angle between Line > Fixed point > 1st point and line > Fixed point > 2nd point). It can be useful to activate the jump function.
Action rotate
Fig. 4-145
The rotation of the objects can also be performed by entering the coordinates in the input fields. The reference point of the coordinates is the left-hand, bottom corner of the font box. Select "Copy" A copy of the selected objects is created and rotated, the original objects are retained.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Font Editor
4-191
Scaling The selected objects are scaled.
Action scaling
First click a point from which the selected objects are to be scaled as a fixed point (this point remains unchanged during scaling). Then click two additional points which define scaling so that the selected objects are enlarged, reduced and distorted so that both points align. It can be useful to activate the jump function.
Action scaling
Fig. 4-146
The rotation of the objects can also be performed by entering the coordinates in the input fields. The reference point of the coordinates is the left-hand bottom corner of the font box.
4-192
Font Editor
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Option Proportional The form of the selected objects remains, the size factor determines scaling. Option Distort The form of the selected objects is distorted, as different size factors can be used for horizontal and vertical scaling. Select "Copy" A copy of the selected objects is created and scaled, the original objects are retained. > Draw polyline Permits the extension of the selected character by insertion of lines or line paths.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Draw polyline
Fig. 4-147
Font Editor
4-193
A polyline can be drawn in the coordinate fields point by point by clicking with the mouse button or entering from the keyboard. A point is defined by pressing the key. Activation of grids and jumps facilitates this activity. The reference point of the coordinates is the left-hand bottom corner of the font box. Select "Closed" The drawn polyline is closed, a connection will therefore be established from the current point to the starting point. Button New line The current line is concluded and a new one starts with the next entry. Button Exit The current line is closed and the "Draw lines" mode is exited. > Change polyline With this it is possible to change a line or several lines of the selected character.
Change polyline
4-194
Font Editor
Fig. 4-148
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
The intersection of the polylines appear in the font field. The center of all individual lines is marked with an additional, smaller point, a so-called hotspot (intermediate point). The lines can be modified by pulling the intersections and the hotspots. Clicking a hotspot activates this for the entry of the coordinates in the entry fields. Variation of a hotspot divides the previous individual line into two lines and therefore serves to refine forms. Activating the grid facilitates this activity. The reference point of the coordinates is the left-hand bottom corner of the font box.
Close polyline
Fig. 4-149
Select "Closed" The drawn polyline is closed, a connection will therefore be established from the current point to the starting point. Button Delete points A point activated with the left mouse button is deleted.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Font Editor
4-195
> Fill Permits filling of the selected character.
Fill
Fig. 4-150
Line distance Setting of the distance of the hatching lines from one another. It is based on the filling width of the laser. Line angle Setting of the angle of the hatching lines. Margin distance Setting of the margin distance, i.e. the distance of the hatching lines to the edge of the character. Select "Alternating directions" Alternating hatching lines can be set here for path optimization. Button Execute Starts hatching. The complicated calculation can take some time.
4-196
Font Editor
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
> CAD Opens the CAD for the selected character and permits use of all CAD functions.
User interface CAD
Fig. 4-151
The menu "File" > "Exit" closes the CAD and returns to the Font Editor. Any existing arcs of circles are dissolved. Therefore parameters for this resolution are requested in a dialog window.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Font Editor
4-197
Precision for CAD import
"Precision for CAD import" dialog window
Fig. 4-152
Precision Defines by which maximum value in millimeters the line dissolution may deviate from the original element. A value which is too low creates a large number of lines, a value which is too low possibly visible corners. Smallest angle for arcs Defines a lower limit for angle dissolution irrespective of the values entered under "Precision". Largest angle for arcs Defines a top limit for angle dissolution irrespective of the values set under "Precision", for example to depict circles below the precision limits with the angle "90" at least as a square. Select "Stop displaying this dialog" The current settings for this session are taken and not requested during the next operation. Button Do not accept ® The changes in the character in the TruTops Mark system are not accepted. They are in the Font Editor with the original character.
Button Accept The changes in the character in the TruTops Mark® system are accepted. They are in the Font Editor with the changed character.
4-198
Font Editor
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
> New character Permits editing of a new character.
New character
"New character" dialog window
Fig. 4-153
A standard character can be typed in or defined with its Unicode number (0x45).
Properties dialog field
Fig. 4-154
In the dialog field the properties of the selected character appear. Left margin Defines the distance of the character from the left-hand margin of the font box. This distance defines the distance to the previous character in a text. If the character extends over this edge, the entry is negative. This character then protrudes into the text box of the previous character (if provided).
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Font Editor
4-199
Font width Shows the font width as a maximum horizontal expansion of the geometry. This value cannot be changed. Right margin Defines the distance of the character from the right-hand margin of the font box. This distance defines the distance to the following character in a text. If the character extends over this edge, the entry is negative. This character then protrudes into the text box of the following character (if provided). Select "Standard font" Makes the selected character the standard character which appears if a character is requested which is not defined in this character set. Select "Background font" Puts the selected character into the background if a new character is to be created. Similarities or width/height ratios can be adjusted. > Jump Activates the jump function to facilitate drawing of new lines.
> Grid Activates the "Properties of the font" and displays it in the font field to facilitate drawing of new lines.
4-200
Font Editor
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
8.5
Help
> Index This menu entry opens the index of the Font Editor help system and opens the respective help file. > Copyright Opens a menu window with information on the Font Editor version.
9.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Tools menu
Tools menu
Fig. 4-155
Tools menu
4-201
9.1
> Layers
Each object is in a defined layer (also refer to Section 4.8 "Edit menu" > "Properties"). With this dialog window drawing elements (dimensions, auxiliary lines, lettering etc.) can be shown and hidden, which ensures enhanced clarity. Layer management
"Layer management" dialog window
Fig. 4-156
Layers are managed on the basis of their names. The current list of the available layers appears in a list field. Here layers can be selected. When a drawing is opened, all layers it contains are listed. Button New Opens a dialog window in which a new layer can be created. This is where a name is assigned and also defined
4-202
•
Whether the layer is to be displayed
•
Whether it can be picked from
•
Whether it should be printed (lasered)
•
Whether it shall be replaced by the block layer.
Tools menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Define new layer
Each layer can also be assigned a color. If on the setting the color "from layer" has been set, all newly inserted objects are printed on a printer in the set color.
"Define new layer" dialog window
Fig. 4-157
Button Modify Opens a dialog window in which an existing layer can be modified. Here it can be selected how the layer should react to certain actions.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
•
The layer is displayed
•
Picking is possible on this layer
•
This layer is printed (lasered)
•
Is replaced by block layer
Tools menu
4-203
Button Delete Deletes the layer selected in the list field. Button List becomes standard Saves the current list of the layers from the list field in registration, previously saved data is overwritten. The standard list created in this way is available for subsequent projects. Button Add from standard Adds all settings of the saved standard list to the existing list of layers. Button Add from drawing Adds all available layers of the current drawing into the layer list, also layers from imported layers or drawing elements inserted from the clipboard. Button Removed unused Removes all layers which are not used in the current drawing. Note The functions for selecting and administration of layers can also be selected from the tool bar. To this purpose click "Layer administration".
1
1 Administrate layers
2
2 Actual layer Fig. 4-158
4-204
Tools menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
9.2
> Measurement type
This submenu is used to determine and modify measurement types. Measurement type management
"Measurement type management" dialog window
Fig. 4-159
Measurement types are managed on the basis of their names. The current list of the available measurement types appears in a list field. One measurement type can be selected. When a drawing is opened, all previously defined measurement types are listed. Button New Opens a dialog window in which a new measurement type can be created.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Tools menu
4-205
Dimensioning parameters
Here a name is assigned. The following properties can be defined:
"Dimensioning parameters" dialog window
Fig. 4-160
Card Geometry Distance and overhang of the measurement lines from the drawing object. The following is defined here: •
Whether auxiliary lines should be drawn on the drawing object at right angles to the measurement lines
•
Whether these end at a distance from the drawing object or overhang
•
Whether the measurement line between the text should be interrupted
•
At which distance the text is positioned above the measurement line
•
Whether a square should be drawn around the measurement line text
•
Which distance this square should have from the text
Card Symbol The following is defined here:
4-206
•
Whether dimensioning should be positioned inside or outside closed lines
•
Which symbol (e.g. open or closed arrow, circle) is used for dimensioning
•
How large the respective symbol is to be displayed in the drawing
Tools menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Card Measurement text Defines the various parameters of the measurement text such as the displayed precision, a possible text in front of and after the measurement number, a scaling factor of this text and the text size. Also permits the selection of options such as whether the text should be positioned outside the mass objects, whether the mass text is rotated (by 90 or 60 degrees or automatically), and whether inside or outside text is always horizontal. Card 2nd Text Permits the output of a second measurement in a different unit. Card Tolerances Permits the definition of tolerance values by which deviation from the measurement number is possible. Card Validity Defines for which measurement types dimensioning is valid (e.g. point dimensioning, coordinate dimensioning, angle dimensioning etc.). Card Color Permits allocation of colors for measurement lines, auxiliary lines and dimensioning symbols. Card Options The following is defined here: •
Which coordinate system is used (global coordinates or coordinates of the current drawing)
•
In which form angle dimensioning should be displayed
•
Whether radii measurements should always be depicted horizontally (bent)
Card Font Defines the font (depending on the fonts available on the respective computer), the typeface (normal, italics, bold) and the color of the measurement texts.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Tools menu
4-207
Button Modify Opens a dialog window in which an existing measurement type can be modified. The properties which can be changed correspond to those described in the section "New". Button Delete Deletes the measurement type selected in the list field. Button List becomes standard Saves the current list of the measurement types from the list field in registration, previously saved data is overwritten. The standard list created in this way is available for subsequent projects. Button Add from standard All settings of the list saved as standard are added to the existing list of measurement types. Button Add from drawing All measurement types of the current drawing are inserted into the list, therefore also the measurement types of imported drawing parts or those inserted from the clipboard. Button Remove unused Only the measurement types appear in the list which can also be used in the current drawing. Button For new objects The currently set measurement type of the list is used as the basis for all newly inserted objects and appears in the respective list field of the tool bar.
4-208
Tools menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
9.3 Color list management
> Colors
In this sub-menu, the colors used in CAD are managed.
"Color list management" dialog window
Fig. 4-161
Color types are managed on the basis of their names. The current list of available colors appears in a list field, one color can be selected. When a drawing is opened, all previously defined colors are listed. Button New Opens a dialog window in which a name can be assigned for the new color. This appears in the list of color names. When the required color is clicked in the right-hand section of the dialog window, this is assigned to the color name. Button Delete Deletes the selected color from the list. Button Define Opens a dialog window in which a new combined color can be defined. The color is then provided in the fields of the user-defined colors. If a previously defined color has been changed, this can be marked in the list field and then selected as the required new color in the right-hand part of the dialog window.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Tools menu
4-209
9.4
> Grid
In the CAD the drawing can be given a background grid. The grid is not output, it only serves for orientation and exact drawing, as with an active grid all drawn objects must be jumped on grid points. The grid can be switched on and off in the "Tools" submenu with the option "Grid active". Grid and local coordinate system
This submenu is used to determine and modify grids.
"Grid and local coordinate system" dialog window
Fig. 4-162
Group field Grid Option Template/Global coordinates States which coordinate system the grid values are based on. Horizontal distance The horizontal grid distance. Vertical distance The vertical grid distance.
4-210
Tools menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Select "Represent grid" Activation and deactivation of the defined grid. Min. pixel spacing With small grid spacing the screen can be covered with the grid. Here the minimum pixel spacing of the grid representation is set, if the value is not reached, only each 10th grid line is represented. Option Points The grid is represented by points. Option Lines The grid is represented by lines. Option Cross The grid is represented by small crosses. Group field Local coordinate system In order to be able to work flexibly with the CAD, it is possible to change the position and value of the coordinate system during a session, for example to adapt to workpiece demands. When this option has been activated, two arrows appear on the drawing area at the previous origin. If the mouse pointer is placed on the intersection point, it changes shape. The coordinate system can be shifted after clicking at the required position. The angle can also be changed by clicking one of the arrow points of this icon, holding down the mouse button and moving. The "Jump" function is active with both actions. All additional coordinate entries and displays then refer to this new coordinate system.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Tools menu
4-211
Select "Display" The stylized coordinate system is displayed at the previous origin. Arrow length Adjust the arrow length on the display. Options Template coordinates, Pixel, Global coordinates State the coordinate system of the arrow length. Reference point X/Y Manual entry of the new origin. Angle Manual entry of the new angle. Select "Set standard" Takes the set values as a standard setting.
9.5
> Grid active
The defined grid can be switched on or off. The active grid is marked with a checkmark. Grid, orthogonal mode and jump can be active at the same time.
9.6
> Orthogonal mode
The orthogonal mode can be switched on or off. The active orthogonal mode is marked with a checkmark. With the active orthogonal mode the drawing activities are displayed with the mouse on the X or Y-axis, so that only horizontal and vertical movements are possible.
4-212
Tools menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
9.7
> Jump mode
The jump mode can be switched on or off. An active jump mode is marked with a checkmark. If the jump mode is active, it is attempted during all drawing activities with the mouse to jump to the next point of an object of the drawing within the jump radius. Note Grid, orthogonal mode and jump can be active at the same time. The following sequence applies in this case: •
Jump is before grid
•
Orthogonal mode is before jump and grid, but
•
The start point is jumped or gridded, depending on the setting
Note If the jump mode is deactivated, this can be activated temporarily by pressing the key.
9.8
> Jump to points of intersection
Here the option is activated or deactivated whether jumping also applies to intersection points when jump mode is activated. The active interaction point jump option is marked with a checkmark. During all drawing activities with the mouse it is attempted to jump to intersection points of drawing objects within the jump radius.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Tools menu
4-213
9.9
> Options
In this submenu various basic settings can be performed for following areas of the CAD editor: •
DXF-Export: Settings for DXF export
•
Background colors: Setting of the background colors
•
Formats: Output formats for coordinates and angles
•
Status line: Format of the status line
•
Jump: Setting of the jump radii
•
Bitmaps: Adjustment of the color depth of the bitmaps
•
Mark: Appearance of the selected, active objects
•
Draw: Basic settings of the system during drawing
•
Point: Display of the point basic element
•
Paths: Paths for various files required in CAD
•
Save: Automatic saving and creation of backup copies
•
Templates: Definition of the drawing templates with new drawings
•
Menu: Shortcuts for menu entries
•
Objects: Jump points and hotspots for the various object types
•
Objects: Activate the conversion from area to hatching
The settings performed in these dialog windows for the respective areas are also saved for new projects with "Save".
4-214
Tools menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Card DXF export In this dialog window it can be set in which DXF/DWG format the export should be performed. The available versions can be selected from the list. Options – Settings
"Settings, DXF export" dialog window
Fig. 4-163
Card Background colors colors The background colors of the drawing area can be selected from this window. Options – Settings
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
"Settings, Background colors" dialog window
Fig. 4-164
Tools menu
4-215
Card Paper The background color of the drawing area. Card Margin The background color of the non-printable margin of the drawing area (depending on the printer type). Card Free area The background color of the free area around the page. With the "Define" function it is possible to determine a user-defined free color, "Invisible" does not affect the background colors. Card Formats In this dialog window the output formats for coordinates and angles as well as the decimal separator (point or comma) can be defined. Options – Settings
"Settings, Formats" dialog window
Fig. 4-165
The following settings are possible:
4-216
•
Comma correction coordinates: The number of digits after the decimal point.
•
Comma correction angle: The number of digits after the decimal point.
•
Angle: Values in decimal degrees, degrees, angles and seconds, arc measure or new degrees.
•
Decimal separator as comma or point.
Tools menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Card Status line In this dialog window settings can be made for display of the status line. Options – Settings
"Settings, Status line" dialog window
Fig. 4-166
Group field Field sizes Setting of the individual area sizes of the status line. The values for the individual fields are percentages and state the ratio of the individual field sizes in relation to one another. The sum of all fields appearing here must be 100%. If this value is not reached, a warning message appears. Zoom slider overview (in percent) Setting of the zoom area. If this value is 100%, the representation of the page size on the screen corresponds to the actual drawing size (zoom slider on the left-hand stop). If values of below 100% are entered, the drawing is shown enlarged by the respective factor, at values of above 100% it is shown accordingly smaller.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Tools menu
4-217
Card Jump The jump radii can be set in this dialog window. Options – Settings
"Settings, Jump" dialog window
Fig. 4-167
For the globally set jump and short-term jump by pressing the key various jump radii can be defined. It can also be defined here from which distance objects can be selected. The values are given in pixel, the jump radius is therefore independent of the zoom section. The following settings apply when jumping is switched on. If no function has been switched on, the activated jump function does not work. Here it is possible for several functions to be active at the same time. Select "Next point" Jumping is performed to the next point, the jump points of the individual objects can be set under "Options" > "Objects" (also refer to the "Objects" section). This function corresponds to classical jumping. Select "Jump point on touched object" The jump point is the jump point set under "Options" > "Objects" of the just touched object. This function serves for easier selection in the case of closely arranged objects.
4-218
Tools menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Select "Next point on touched object" The next point on the touched object nearest to the mouse pointer is jumped. The jump point is therefore exactly on the object, positioning is determined by the mouse pointer position. Select "Foot point on touched object" This function corresponds to the construction of a perpendicular point. It is therefore only useful on the second point of a line which is jumped on the perpendicular foot point of the start point of the line. Select "Tangential point on touched object" This function corresponds to the construction of a tangential point. It is therefore only effective with the second point of an object (line, circle or arc of a circle) which is jumped to the touched point of the object start point with a circle or circle arc. Card Bitmaps The color depth of bitmaps can be set in this dialog window. Options – Settings
"Settings, Bitmaps" dialog window
Do not modify
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Fig. 4-168
When black and white bitmaps are imported, the color depth should remain unchanged.
Tools menu
4-219
Card Mark This dialog window is used to set how activated objects can be shown by selecting. Options – Settings
"Settings, Mark" dialog window
Fig. 4-169
Select "Invert marked object" Marked objects are displayed in the inverted color. Select "Display surrounding rectangle" A dotted frame is shown around the activated objects. Activation of this option is not valid until the CAD has been started. Color selection If "Invert marked objects" is deactivated, activated objects are displayed in the color shown here. New colors can be defined with "Define".
4-220
Tools menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Card Draw In this dialog window various basic settings can be made which affect the behavior of the program during drawing. Options – Settings
"Settings, Draw" dialog window
Fig. 4-170
Group field Right mouse button The function of the right mouse button during drawing and construction can be switched over as described below. Option Context menu for length, angle If a length or an angle is required during construction, the property of this object is assumed by moving the mouse pointer on an object of the drawing and clicking it with the right mouse button. When this function has been activated, a context menu appears on the corresponding object in which the required property can be selected.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Context menu length/angle
Fig. 4-171
Tools menu
4-221
Option Click and input If the right mouse button is pressed during drawing, it acts as if the left mouse button and the key were pressed one after another. Option Only input If the right mouse button is pressed during drawing, it acts as if the key were pressed. Select "Repeat last drawing operation" Immediately after conclusion of a drawing operation (e.g. lines of point, length, angle) the system repeats the same operation (the start point of the next line can be stated). This function is only effective if several identical operations have to be performed. This function is cancelled with the key. Select "Zoom section with a click" If this option is activated, the zoom section to be selected is defined by holding down, dragging and releasing the left-hand mouse button. Otherwise first click and then drag; a second click cancels the action (also see Section 5.5 "> Free section"). Select "Repeat zoom section action" If this option is activated, the zoom section selected from the "Menu" > "View" > "Free section" can be executed continuously in succession without further menu selection (also refer to the section 5.5 "> Free section"). This can be used to penetrate to very small details in several steps without having to make another menu selection each time. This procedure can be terminated by:
4-222
•
Pressing the key
•
Pressing the button of the draw tool bar
•
Selection of any menu item
Tools menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Card Point The display of the point drawing element can be set in this dialog window. Note Precondition for this function is the activation of the option "Display points" in the menu "Tools" > "Options" > "Objects" > "Points". Options – Settings
"Settings, Point" dialog window
Fig. 4-172
Group field Represent – Symbol Options Point (.), Cross (+), Cross (x), Line (I), No symbol The representation form of the point is set here. If "Line" is selected, the point is symbolized by a short vertical line. The top end point depicts the end of the point. – Addition Options Square, Circle A square or a circle is drawn around the point symbol. Group field Size Symbol size Here the size of the symbol selected under "Represent" > "Symbol" is set. Options Pixel, Template coordinates, Global coordinates Here the unit of the symbol size input is defined.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Tools menu
4-223
Card Paths Paths for file folders can be determined in this dialog window, which are required for work with the CAD editor. Options – Settings
"Settings, Paths" dialog window
Fig. 4-173
Card Save In this dialog window the time can be specified after which the automatic save function is activated. Apart from that it can be determined whether a backup copy should be created. Options – Settings
"Settings, Save" dialog window
4-224
Tools menu
Fig. 4-174
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Card Templates Options – Settings
"Settings, Templates" dialog window
Fig. 4-175
Select "Use always this template" Here you can define that the respective template is always used for a new drawing without a prompt. Card Menu In this dialog window shortcuts can be defined for all entries in the drawing program window in order to achieve fast access to the respective functions.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Tools menu
4-225
The defined shortcuts are displayed in the menus after the respective menu texts. Options – Settings
"Settings, Menu" dialog window
Fig. 4-176
Representation window Shows the menu structure and permits the selection of the menu entry for which a shortcut is to be defined. Key Selection of the key with which the marked menu entry of the representation window is to be opened. Select "-, -, key" Stipulates whether the selected key should execute the shortcut in connection with the , or key. Button Assign abbreviation The selected key combination is assigned to the marked menu entry in the representation window. If the key combination is to be saved permanently after the current session, click the "Save" button. Button Remove abbreviation The displayed key combination for the marked menu entry of the representation window is deleted. If the key combination is to be deleted permanently after the current session, click the "Save" button.
4-226
Tools menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Card Objects In this dialog window the jump points and hotspots for the various object types can be set. With several objects it is also possible to perform specific settings. Options – Settings
"Settings, Objects, Circle" dialog window
Fig. 4-177
Jump points determine the area of an object onto which other drawing objects can be jumped if they are near the jump points. Hotspots are active when an existing object of the drawing is marked. If the mouse pointer is moved on such a hotspot, it is possible to change the respective property of the object for which the hotspot stands by holding down and dragging (e.g. angle, size).
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Tools menu
4-227
Cards Objects – Point In addition to the jump point it can be adjusted whether points are represented or not. The representation form of the point can be set (also refer to Section 9.10 "Options" > "Point"). Options – Settings
"Settings, Objects, Point" dialog window
Fig. 4-178
Cards Objects – Polyline In addition to the jump point the precision can be set with which polylines are split into lines or lines and arcs. During the marking process the polyline is converted to a vector line. The precision value defines the maximum inaccuracy to the original polyline. Options – Settings
"Settings, Objects, Polyline" dialog window
4-228
Tools menu
Fig. 4-179
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Cards Objects – Ellipse arc / Ellipse In addition to the jump point the precision can be set with which ellipses and ellipse arcs are split into lines or lines and arcs. During the marking process the polyline is converted to a vector line. The precision value defines the maximum inaccuracy to the original ellipse or to the original ellipse arc. Options – Settings
"Settings, Objects, Ellipse" dialog window
Fig. 4-180
Cards Objects – Hatching A hatching can also be displayed as an area by clicking the "Slow hatch as area" checkbox in the group field "Miscellaneous", confirming with "OK" and restarting the CAD.
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
"Settings, Objects, Hatching" dialog window
Fig. 4-181
Tools menu
4-229
10.
Window menu
Here all the open windows of the CAD can be arranged in different ways. The selectable options comply with the conventions with regard to the arrangement of file windows:
Window menu
11.
Fig. 4-182
Menu ? (Help)
Help menu
Fig. 4-183
11.1 > Index This menu entry accesses the index of the CAD help system and opens the respective help file.
11.2 > Copyright Opens a menu window with information on the CAD version.
4-230
Window menu
SW-EN-TTM-04-00 02/2010
Chapter 5
Examples, exercises
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
1.
Introduction.................................................................... 5-3
2. 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6
Example – Compass...................................................... 5-4 Creating a graphic ........................................................... 5-5 Administrate and allocate laser parameters .................. 5-26 Optimize marking program ............................................ 5-31 Optimize graphic............................................................ 5-32 Optimize marking sequence .......................................... 5-32 Optimize laser parameters............................................. 5-34
3. 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4
Rating plate example................................................... 5-38 Inserting the TRUMPF logo and lettering ...................... 5-44 Define and position variables ........................................ 5-48 Sorting interactively ....................................................... 5-53 Set laser parameters ..................................................... 5-55
4. 4.1
Target example ............................................................ 5-63 Define hatching style ..................................................... 5-67
5. 5.1
CE mark example......................................................... 5-70 "Trim (cut)" tool .............................................................. 5-74
Introduction
5-1
5-2
6. 6.1 6.2
Example bitmap ........................................................... 5-77 Importing bitmap ............................................................ 5-78 Setting laser parameter ................................................. 5-81
7. 7.1 7.2
Import external file formats ........................................ 5-82 Import PCR files............................................................. 5-82 Import CAD files............................................................. 5-83
8. 8.1 8.2 8.3
Determining laser parameters.................................... 5-84 Determining laser parameters for plastic....................... 5-84 Determining laser parameters for annealing metals...... 5-86 Determining laser parameters for engraving metals ..... 5-88
Introduction
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
1.
Introduction
This chapter contains examples of how to: •
Draw graphic elements
•
Work with variables
•
Administrate and allocate laser parameters
•
Optimize marking programs
•
Import file formats such as, HPGL – IGES – DXF – DWG – PCR – BMP – JPG –
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
Introduction
5-3
2. Assignment
Example – Compass
Create a marking program which generates the following graphic:
Example graphic for creating a marking program
5-4
Example – Compass
Fig. 5-1
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
2.1
Creating a graphic
This section describes how you can genarate the graphic "wind rose" (Fig. 5-1).
Procedure
•
Create new marking program.
•
Set grid.
•
Draw circles.
•
Draw rectangle.
•
Draw octagon.
•
Enter text.
•
Move text.
•
Rotate text.
•
Enter circular text.
•
Read in logo from a file.
You can enter geometric figures in two ways: •
From the tool bar.
•
With the "Draw" menu.
The following instructions only describe the method using the tool bar for each figure. The sequence in which the figures and text are entered determines the sequence with which the laser transfers the elements of the graphic to the workpiece. The sequence can be subsequently changed in order to optimize the marking program.
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
Example – Compass
5-5
Create marking program
If the drawing field already contains graphic elements: ¾
Activate the "New" function in the "File" menu. A new drawing field appears.
Set grid
1. Select the "Grid" function in the "Tools" menu. The "grid and local coordinate system" dialog window opens up.
"Grid and local coordinate system" dialog window
Fig. 5-2
2. Enter the required values. 3. Click "OK". The dialog window is closed. Grid points are displayed in the drawing field at the defined spacing.
5-6
Example – Compass
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
Draw circles
1. Click the (1) "Draw circle" and also activate the (2) "Center point, radius" button. The mouse pointer appears as a pencil with a circle.
1
2 "Draw" tool bar
Fig. 5-3
2. Move the pencil with the mouse to the place where the center lines intercept and click once with the left mouse button. The inside circle should have a diameter of 30 mm. 3. Move the mouse around 15 mm to the right and click with the left button. 4. Draw two additional circles by repeating steps 2 and 3 but place the circles on another position on the drawing field Note If the item "Repeat last drawing operation" in the Extras -> Options -> Draw menu is activated, you can draw more circles by clicking the right mouse button. You can end this function by pressing the Escape key or by selecting another tool. The coordinates of the mouse pointer is displayed in 2 ways: – Digitally in the center of the button bar – As an analog display in the form of red lines on the rulers at the edge of the drawing field.
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
Example – Compass
5-7
5. Select one of the circles by clicking the edge. 6. Using the right mouse button, open the context menu and click on the "Properties" entry. A dialog opens.
"Modify circle properties" dialog window
Fig. 5-4
7. Enter 15 mm for the first circle radius. 8. Click "OK". 9. Center the circle by clicking the "vertical page center" and "horizontal page center" buttons one after the other. Note These buttons only appear when you have marked an element. Each additional circle should be 5 mm larger. 10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 and enter 20 or 25 mm into the dialog. Your drawing should then look like the image below.
5-8
Example – Compass
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
Drawing field with three circles
Correct errors
Fig. 5-5
If you want to delete the graphic element again, proceed as follows: 1. Click anywhere on the graphic element to be deleted. The graphic element is depicted with a dotted square.
Entf
2. Press . The marked graphic element is deleted.
Save marking program
You should save the results of your work after each partial step. 3. Click on the "Save" icon next to it. The "Save as" dialog box appears.
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
"Save as" dialog window
Fig. 5-6
Example – Compass
5-9
4. Select the folder for your marking programs. Enter the "EXERCISE" file name. 5
Click the "Save" button. The name entered [EXERCISE] is in the title bar of CAD.
The marking program is saved as the file "EXERCISE.VLF". As you continue, you can save your work simply by clicking the "Save" icon. If you do not wish to overwrite the existing file, select the menu item "Save as" in the "File" menu and enter a new path and file name in the dialog box. Draw rectangle
1. Click the "Rectangle" button and also activate the "Rectangle: two diagonal points" button. The mouse pointer appears as a pencil.
"Draw" tool bar
Fig. 5-7
2. Place the pencil at the top left next to the circles and click once with the left button. Drag the mouse over the circles to the bottom right and conclude the action with a left click. The corners of the square are fixed in position. Esc
3. Cancel the "Rectangle" action by pressing .
4. Center the square by marking it and clicking the "vertical page center" and "horizontal page center" buttons. There should be a distance of 1 mm from the outer circle to the square. The circle diameter is 50 mm. The square must therefore have a side length of 52 mm.
5-10
Example – Compass
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
5. Mark the square by clicking it at any point. Open the context menu with the right mouse button and click the "Properties" entry. 6. Enter 52 mm for "Width" and "Height" and click the "OK" button. The corners of the square must be grooved. 7. To this purpose click the "Tools" button. The various tools are shown on the buttons.
Tool bar
Fig. 5-8
8. Click the "Concave Fillet" button. To the right additional fields are then displayed. 9. Enter 4 mm for the radius. 10. Move to a corner of the square with the mouse pointer. The mouse pointer changes to a pair of scissors. 11. Then click with the left mouse button. The grooving is cut out. 12. Repeat the described steps with the other corners. The square which surrounds the three circles is drawn.
Esc
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
¾
To cancel the tool mode press the key.
Example – Compass
5-11
Your graphic should then look like the image below.
Current processing status
Draw octagon
Fig. 5-9
1. Draw an auxiliary square that surrounds the current graphic and center it horizontally and vertically. 2. Mark the square and open the context menu. 3. Click the "Properties" entry and enter 68 mm for "Width" and "Height". 4. Center the square once more. 5. Click the "Reproduce" button. The "Reproduce (matrix)" dialog appears.
5-12
Example – Compass
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
¾
7. Change this as shown.
"Reproduce (matrix)" dialog window
Fig. 5-10
To the right of the graphic a new, identical square has been created. 6. Mark this and open "Properties". 7. Enter 45 ° for "Angle of rotation" and then click "OK". The square has then been rotated. 8. Center the square in by marking it and by clicking the "vertical page center" and "horizontal page center" buttons.
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
Example – Compass
5-13
Auxiliary squares
Fig. 5-11
9. Click the "Section" button. A cross appears. 10. Click on a point and pull the frame around the square. When the mouse button is released, the graphic is enlarged.
"Polyline" button
Fig. 5-12
11. Click the "Polyline" button. The mouse pointer appears as a pencil. New fields appear.
Fig. 5-13
12. Open the dialog below with the downward pointing arrow.
5-14
Example – Compass
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
"Construct Polyline" dialog window
Fig. 5-14
13. Mark the box "Closed" and close this dialog box. In this manner the polygon is closed when completed. 14. Activate the jump function with the "Jump" button. The octagon is then much easier to draw. 15. Move to coordinates X 74, Y 94 with the pencil. The pencil turns into a dart. This means that your positioning is on target. 16. As soon as the dart appears click with the mouse. (Start at the arrow as shown under Fig. 5-11 17. Move clockwise to points 2 to 8 and mark these by clicking the mouse. 18. Conclude the last (9th) point by clicking with the right mouse button. The octagon has then been drawn.
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
Example – Compass
5-15
¾
To exit the polygon mode, click the right checkmark.
Exit polygon mode
Delete auxiliary squares
Fig. 5-15
Now the auxiliary squares must be deleted. ¾ Click both squares one after the other while holding the key and delete these with the key. The graphic then looks like the image below.
Current processing status
5-16
Example – Compass
Fig. 5-16
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
Next, the missing texts are created. Enter text 1. Click the "Text or barcode" button. The "Data object" dialog appears.
"Data object" dialog window
Fig. 5-17
2. Select "As text" and click on "Text properties". The "Properties of the text object" dialog appears.
"Properties of the text object" dialog window
Fig. 5-18
3. Fill out the fields as shown in Fig. 5-18 and click the "OK" button. Return to the dialog box "Data object".
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
Example – Compass
5-17
4. To this purpose click "Position". The mouse pointer appears as a pencil with the letters "North". 5. Move the mouse to the empty top field, center the text visually and then click once with the left mouse button. The text is then provisionally positioned. However, you wish to position the text exactly. 6. The text is still marked. Click the "Center horizontally" button. The distance from the lettering to the square should be 2 mm. 7. This is achieved by setting position X to 48 mm in the context menu "Properties", "Change properties", "Position" (2 mm higher than the rectangle). Rotate text
Create the texts: "East", "South", "West". This is most quickly performed as follows: 1. Mark the text "North" and then click "Reproduce". 2. The "Reproduce (circularly)" dialog opens.
"Reproduce (circularly)" dialog window
3.
5-18
Fig. 5-19
Take the settings from the dialog above and click "OK".
Example – Compass
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
The graphic appears as follows:
Current processing status
Fig. 5-20
4. Place the three texts in the correct fields by selecting and dragging them. 5. Click the right mouse button on "North" and on "Properties" in the context menu. Click "Modify properties" in the following dialog. In the next dialog overwrite "North" with "South" and then click "OK". 6. Close the "Variable" dialog. The text is still marked. 7. Center it vertically with the respective button. Overwrite in the same way and position the two remaining texts. Circular text 1. Click the "Text or barcode" button once more. Select "Text properties" in the "Data object" dialog. 2. Enter the text in the entry field and take the settings from the following dialog.
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
Example – Compass
5-19
"Properties of the text object" dialog window
Fig. 5-21
3. Click on the "Position" tab.
"Properties of the text object" dialog window
5-20
Example – Compass
Fig. 5-22
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
4. Enter the settings from Fig. 5-22. (Position X, Y must not be entered). 5. Click button "OK". The dialog box "Data object" appears.
Placing text
Fig. 5-23
6. Click "Position". The mouse pointer changes to a pencil with attached lettering. 7. Move the pencil to the place where the text should be placed. As soon as you click with the left-hand mouse the text is fixed in place. 8. Now enter the remaining text, "CAD" as described in Fig. 5-1.
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
Example – Compass
5-21
Position and properties of the text object
Fig. 5-24
9. Take the displayed values and settings shown on the "Position" tab. Note To ensure that the text is curved downwards, a negative preceding sign must be entered before "Radius". 10. Position the text as described above. Your graphic should then look like the image below.
Current editing status
5-22
Example – Compass
Fig. 5-25
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
Read in logo from a file
Paste the TRUMPF logo into the graphics and place it in the center of the circle. The logo comes from a DXF file. 1. Click the item "Import DXF/DWG file" in the "Edit" menu.
"Edit" menu
Fig. 5-26
¾ The "Open" dialog appears.
"Open" dialog window
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
Example – Compass
Fig. 5-27
5-23
2. Select the file "Trumpf_Logo.dxf" in "C:\TRUMARK\VLF\Import". The "Import scale allocation" dialog appears.
"Import scale allocation" dialog window
the
directory
Fig. 5-28
In the dialog window "Assign import standard", set the import parameters for the DXF file. The function "Optimal standard suggests which standard you can use to import the logo. This corresponds to the field size and would be too large in this particular case. Note Refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.9 "Edit menu" > "Import file" for more information on importing files.
5-24
Example – Compass
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
3. Click on the "Vertical sheet center" and "Horizontal sheet center" buttons and then on "OK". The logo appears in the center of the graphic. The graphic is fully created. Your drawing field should then look like the image below.
Drawing field with completed graphic
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
Example – Compass
Fig. 5-29
5-25
2.2 Procedure •
Cancel grouping
Administrate and allocate laser parameters
Cancel grouping
•
Enter laser parameters for the circles.
•
Enter the laser parameters for additional graphic elements.
•
Change the allocation of the laser parameters.
First find out if the graphic elements are grouped. In this case proceed as follows. If the graphic elements can be individually marked, you can proceed with the "Enter laser parameters for the circles". 1. Click on each individual graphic element. If several graphic elements are clicked with one click, these are grouped. Cancel the grouping as follows: 2. Mark the grouped graphic elements. Open the context menu with the right mouse button and click "Dissolve".
Context menu Dissolve
Fig. 5-30
3. Continue with all graphic elements which are still grouped. When the graphic elements have been dissolved, they can be marked individually.
5-26
Example – Compass
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
Administrate laser parameters
1. Click the "Administrate laser parameter" button. The "Administrate laser parameter" dialog opens.
"Administrate laser parameters" dialog window
Fig. 5-31
2. Click in the line "In this project" and then click 6 times on "Insert new parameter". You have now opened six new parameters which you will need for the "wind rose" project.
Section laser parameters
Fig. 5-32
3. Overwrite these with "Circles", "Squares", "Rectangle", "North etc.", "Cross-section" and "Logo" and confirm the entry with .
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
Example – Compass
5-27
To this purpose simply click in the blue area. The cursor flashes. You can then overwrite. 5. Now click the "Circles" parameter and then on the "Main parameter" tab. 6. Enter the value for "Circles" in accordance with Tab. 5-1.
"Administrate laser parameters" dialog window
Fig. 5-33
7. Enter the other values in the same manner and then click "OK". The dialog box is closed and you return to the drawing field. Graphic element(s)
Track width mm
Power [%]
Velocity [mm/s]
Pulse freq. [Hz]
Circles
0.050
70
600
22000
Squares
0.050
70
500
25000
Rectangle
0.050
70
1000
30000
North etc.
0.050
80
1000
35000
Crosssection
0.050
70
700
28000
Logo
0.050
90
600
40000 Tab. 5-1
5-28
Example – Compass
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
Allocate laser parameters
The laser parameters must then be allocated to the individual graphic elements. 1. First mark the three circles. To this purpose hold down the key and then click the three circles one after the other. 2. Open the context menu and select "Group". The three circles then form a group. The next time they are clicked all three are marked. 3. Open the "Modify object properties" dialog box and then click on the "Laser" tab.
"Modify block properties" dialog window
Fig. 5-34
Note The graphic elements which you have marked can be checked on the left. In the center you can see the parameters which you created previously.
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
Example – Compass
5-29
4. Select the laser parameter "circles" and click on "OK". 5. Click a free place in the drawing field. The circles are displayed in the color which you selected for them. The laser parameters for the circles have been entered. Proceed as described above for the other graphic elements. Group the elements with the same laser parameters together. Note The values in Tab. 5-1 have been selected at random as a sample exercise. To get optimal results, trials are done to determine the parameters Click the "Save marking program" button. The marking program has then been created.
5-30
Example – Compass
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
2.3
Optimize marking program
The optimization of a marking program is usually only necessary when you are processing a material for the first time. You will generally be able to achieve the best possible results by a few marking trials and subsequent optimization steps. Note TRUMPF recommends saving various optimization steps as separate files and logging the results carefully. You will then create a database which can be useful for subsequent marking jobs. Optimization criteria
Methods
You can optimize a marking program with regard to: •
The marking quality
•
Duration of the program sequence
You have two methods: •
Optimize the graphic
•
Optimize the marking sequence
•
Optimize laser parameters
•
Change offset values
•
Optimize the optics system
The methods are described in the following sections.
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
Example – Compass
5-31
2.4
Optimize graphic
The graphics in CAD are vector graphics. Especially in the case of imported graphics, it can be useful to optimize the graphics by deleting individual vectors lying near each other or by replacing graphics with small vectors with polylines. Amongst other things, you can carry out the following functions using CAD:
Change the graphic
•
Change the size, position and orientation of graphic elements
•
Delete graphic elements
•
Add graphic elements
•
Change the font
1. Start the CAD. 2. Load the marking program which is to be optimized. The graphic of the marking program appears in the drawing field. 3. Change the graphic as required. Refer to Section 2.1 and to Chapter 3 of this manual for further information on the procedures. 4. Save the changed marking program. Select a new file name if you want to retain the original condition. 5. Close the CAD program. The changed marking program can then be executed.
2.5
Optimize marking sequence
In order to shorten the running time of a marking program it can be preferable to change the sequence in which the graphic elements are transferred to the workpiece. If you do not change the sequence, the graphic elements are executed in the sequence in which they were drawn.
5-32
Example – Compass
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
Sort objects
The graphic elements of the marking program are sorted so that the program running time is as short as possible. Note You can change the graphic elements manually if you want a different sequence than that generated by the automatic program.
Methods
•
The following dialog shows the criteria according to which you can perform sorting.
"Sort objects" dialog window
Fig. 5-35
You can either:
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
•
Sort all objects or
•
Only sort marked objects
Example – Compass
5-33
You can then sort according to: •
Laser power
•
Focusing
•
Z offset
•
All criteria can be given priorities.
When you select "Manual sort" you can change the sorting sequence according to your own wishes. 1. Click the individual elements in the required sequence. 2. Save the changed marking program. Select a new file name if you want to retain the original condition. 3. Close the CAD program. The changed marking program can then be executed. Note More information on changing the marking sequence can be found in Chapter 4, Section 7.5 "Laser menu" > "Sort".
2.6
Optimize laser parameters
The laser parameters have a decisive influence on: •
The marking quality
•
Duration of the program sequence
You can change the laser parameters using the CAD. Proceed as described in Section 2.2. The following items are possibilities for optimizing the laser parameters. Lines too weak
If the lines are too weak: •
5-34
Increase the power for the respective graphic elements – or lower the speed – or increase the pulse frequency
Example – Compass
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
Lines too thick
If the lines are too thick: ¾
Program running time too long
lower the power for the respective graphic elements – or increase the speed – or lower the pulse frequency
If the marking program is too slow: ¾
Increase the speed
Note Please note that a higher speed normally means weaker lines. This can be compensated by increasing the power.
Notes on selecting the pulse frequency The pulse frequency should always be selected so that the individual pulses on the workpiece generate points which overlap. The pulse frequency is therefore related to the following parameters: •
Focus diameter
•
Speed of scanning
The following figure shows the correlation between the pulse frequency and the position of the points which are generated by the two consecutive pulses on the workpieces.
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
Example – Compass
5-35
1
1 2
2
Pulse frequency too high Pulse frequency correct
3
3
Pulse frequency too low
Influence of the pulse frequency
Fig. 5-36
Furthermore on lasers with a Q-switch the pulse power and the pulse energy depend on the pulse frequency. The following diagram shows the principal link.
P Q
0
5
10
15
20 fp [kHz]
Pulse power P, pulse energy Q depending on the pulse frequency
5-36
Example – Compass
Fig. 5-37
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
Determining the pulse frequency
The following example shows how the pulse frequency fp can be determined. Assuming the following values:
Example
Parameter
Symbol
Value
Diameter of the point which a laser pulse produces on the workpiece
d
40 µm
Overlapping
Δx
25 µm
This results in the step
Δs
15 µm
v
300 mm/s
Scanning speed Example parameters for calculating the pulse frequency
Tab. 5-2
d
Δx Δs
Example parameters for calculating the pulse frequency
Fig. 5-38
This results in the time Δt from pulse to pulse:
Δt =
Δs v
=
15μm 300 mm / s
= 50 μs
This results in the pulse frequency fp:
fp
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
=
1 Δt
=
1 50 μs
Example – Compass
= 20 000 Hz
5-37
3.
Rating plate example
In this example you will practice the following steps: •
Drawing a rating plate
•
Filling the rating plate with text
•
Inserting variable text
•
Importing a DXF file
•
Define laser parameters
•
Allocate laser parameters 1
2
3
TruMark Serie
4
5
6
7
1 Logo (DXF file)
5 Serial number
2 Character set 1451BF4, 3 mm
6 Interactive field
3 Character set Standard, 2 mm
7 Current date
4 Character set Standard, 3 mm Layout rating plate
5-38
Rating plate example
Fig. 5-39
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
100
86
73
52
20
0
The rating plate has the following dimensions:
35 25 17 8
60
32
23
0
Dimensions nameplate
Draw outer contour
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
R1,5
Fig. 5-40
¾
Select the "New" menu item in the "File" menu, or
¾
Click the button with the same function A new drawing project is created.
¾
In the "Draw" menu select the item "Rectangle" and then the entry "Point, Width, Height, Angle", or
¾
Click on the button "Rectangle" and then on
¾
"Point, Width, Height".
¾
Click this button. The following dialog field appears.
Rating plate example
5-39
"Rectangle: point, width, height" dialog window
Fig. 5-41
¾
Enter the required values into the dialog field. As a starting point select the position X0 / Y0. The rating plate has a width of 100 mm and a height of 35 mm. You get the following contour:
Current processing status
Corner fillet ¾
5-40
Fig. 5-42
In the "Draw" menu select the item "Tools" and then the item "Corner Fillet", or
Rating plate example
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
¾
First click the "Tools" button then the "Fillet" button.
¾
Enter the required value – in this case 1.5 mm – in the dialog box.
"Corner fillet" dialog window
Fig. 5-43
Note If this dialog does not appear, click the black down arrow. You can also enter the radius without opening the dialog. ¾
Move the mouse pointer on to the corners that you want to round off. The mouse pointer changes to a pair of scissors. Then click with the left mouse button. A radius of 1.5 mm is then created.
¾
Repeat this procedure on the outer contours of the nameplate. The contour is then as shown below:
Current processing status
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
Rating plate example
Fig. 5-44
5-41
Draw inside lines
¾
In the "Draw" menu select the item "Line" and then the item "Two points", or
¾
Click the button with the same function.
¾
With the next 10 steps enter the start and end points. Conclude each step by clicking the red cross.
6
7
3
8
4
9
5
10
Start and end points of the lines
Fig. 5-45
Note Do not move the mouse pointer into the drawing area, otherwise the previously entered values will be overwritten and you will have to start from the beginning.
5-42
Rating plate example
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
The rating plate then looks like the diagram below:
Current processing status
Fig. 5-46
Save the project. In the "File" menu select the "Save as" item and save the file under the name Type logo.vlf.
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
"Save as" dialog window
Fig. 5-47
Rating plate example
5-43
Center
¾
Pull a frame around the rating plate. All elements have then been picked and can be moved together.
¾
Now click these buttons one after another. The rating plate is centered horizontally and vertically.
3.1
Inserting the TRUMPF logo and lettering
Insert the TRUMPF logo and the text into the nameplate. ¾
Click the item "Import DXF/DWG file" in the "Edit" menu. The "Open" dialog appears. Select the file "Trumpf_Logo.dxf" in the directory "C:\TRUMARK\VLF\Import"
"Open" dialog window
¾
5-44
Fig. 5-48
Click "Open". The "Import scale allocation" dialog appears.
Rating plate example
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
"Import scale allocation" dialog window
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
Fig. 5-49
¾
Overwrite the scale with: "0.25:1". (The logo is imported with ¼ of the original size).
¾
For "Vertical position" enter "Left", for "Horizontal position", "Top" and confirm the entries with "OK". The logo then appears in the top left-hand corner of the drawing field.
¾
Pick it and pull it to the required position.
Rating plate example
5-45
The text then follows: "TRUMPF Laser Marking Systems AG" ¾
Click the "Text" button. The dialog window "Data object" appears.
"Data object" dialog window
¾
Mark the options box "As text" in the group box "Appearance" and then click on the button "Text properties".
"Properties of the text object" dialog window
5-46
Fig. 5-50
Rating plate example
Fig. 5-51
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
¾
In the white field enter the text. For "Text size" enter the font size in mm and under "Fonts" enter the respective name or select the required name from the pull-down menu.
¾
Confirm the entries with "OK".
¾
You will then return to the "Data object" dialog. The position option is then activated.
¾
Click the "Activate" button.
¾
Your text then appears on the drawing area as a shadow.
¾
Now move the mouse to the position where the text is to be entered. As soon as the text is accurately positioned click with the left-hand mouse button.
For the lettering on the next line use the "Standard" font. Proceed as described previously.
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
Rating plate example
5-47
3.2 Serial number ¾
Define and position variables
Open the "Data object" "Administrate variable list".
dialog
and
click
"Administrate variable list" dialog window
¾
the
button
Fig. 5-52
Click the "New variable" button.
The dialog window "Define new variable" appears. ¾
Enter "Number" in the text box "Variable name".
"Define new variable" dialog window
¾
5-48
Fig. 5-53
Click "OK".
Rating plate example
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
¾
For the variable "Number", select the input "Serial number" from the drop-down list box "Data origin:".
Dialog window variable list "Number"
Interactive variable
¾
Enter the values in the group box "Properties of Number" as shown in Fig. 5-54.
¾
Create a variable with the name "ID Number".
¾
Select "Interactively" from the drop-down list box "Data origin".
Dialog window list list "ID Number"
¾
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
Fig. 5-54
Fig. 5-55
Enter the ID number in text field prompt text.
Rating plate example
5-49
Variable current date
¾
Define the variable "Current date".
¾
Select "Code word" from the drop-down list box "Data origin".
¾
Click on the arrow next to "Code word:" to reveal more options.
A selection of date and time formats is opened.
Administrate variables (section)
¾
5-50
Fig. 5-56
Mark the required format for the date. The line is accepted.
Rating plate example
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
¾
Click the "Paste" button. The format for the date is transferred to the text box "Complete text:"
Note If further key words are needed, select them and press "Insert". The new key word is added to the existing key word.
Administrate variables (section)
•
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
Fig. 5-57
Exit the dialog window "Administrate variables (section)" by clicking on "OK".
Rating plate example
5-51
Positioning variables
Data object
Fig. 5-58
¾
Select the variable "Number" from the drop-down list box "Reference variable:". If desired, you can select a font, text size and further attributes using the button "Text properties".
¾
Now click on "Place" and position the variable "Number" as a normal text.
¾
Repeat the procedure for the variables "Current date" and "ID Number".
The nameplate layout is shown in Fig. 5-39.
5-52
Rating plate example
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
3.3
Sorting interactively
To optimize the marking processing sequence, the lines, radii and lettering are sorted. Before you begin sorting, you must select all objects you would like to sort. Click in the drawing level with the right mouse button and pull a rectangle over the objects requiring sorting. ¾
Select the "Sort" menu item in the "Laser" menu, or
¾
Click the button with the same function. The dialog window "Sort objects" is opened.
"Sort objects" dialog window
Fig. 5-59
Now click the "Manual sort" button. Each individual object is given a number. This number stands for the processing sequence (Fig. 5-60).
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
Rating plate example
5-53
TruMark Serie
Marking field sorting sequence
Fig. 5-60
Note The black spot appears here because very many polygon contours must be sorted. When enlarged (Fig. 5-61), this is what it looks like:
Detail polygon contours
Sort manually
Fig. 5-61
The automatically suggested sequence can be recompiled by clicking on the individual objects with the mouse. For this, press the key and move the mouse pointer so that it touches the required object. Once the mouse pointer is over the object, the corresponding sorting number jumps to the mouse pointer. When the key is released, the position remains saved. By using the right mouse button or by pressing , you can confirm this action. By pressing or clicking on any menu selection, this action is cancelled.
5-54
Rating plate example
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
3.4
Set laser parameters
In this section, you will learn how global parameters are applied in projects. The rating plate is to be cut from the film without burning the backing. This is achieved by allocating separate parameters to the frame. Name this parameter "Cut". The lettering and the inside lines should be marked without cutting the film. Name this parameter "Font". ¾
Select the "Laser parameter" menu item from the "Laser" menu, or
¾
Click the button with the same function. The dialog box "Administrate laser parameters" appears on the screen (refer to Fig. 5-62).
"Administrate laser parameter" dialog window
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
Rating plate example
Fig. 5-62
5-55
Set main parameter
¾
Click the top entry under "(Global parameters)" and then twice on the "Insert new parameter" button. Two parameter entries appear with the designation "Parameter x".
¾
Click on the marking and change it to "Cut" und "Font" (also refer to Fig. 5-62).
¾
Click the "Main parameter" tab, mark the "Cut" parameter and accept the values as shown in Fig. 5-63.
¾
Allocate a color to this parameter.
"Administrate laser parameter" dialog window
5-56
Fig. 5-63
¾
Change now to the parameter "Font" and accept the values as shown in Fig. 5-64.
¾
Allocate a color to this parameter.
Rating plate example
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
"Administrate laser parameter" dialog window
Fig. 5-64
You have now defined the parameters "Cut" and "Font" as "Global parameters". In future they will be available for similar projects. To be able to use the parameters in "In this project", you have to create a link. ¾
Click the "Cut" parameter, hold down the left mouse button and pull the parameter downwards. A link has then been created.
¾
Repeat this step for the "Font" parameter.
The dialog field "Administrate laser parameter" appears just as shown in Fig. 5-65.
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
Rating plate example
5-57
"Administrate laser parameter" dialog window
Fig. 5-65
Note If you change the global parameters, the changes are accepted by the links. The linked parameters cannot be changed. Allocate laser parameter "Trim"
The laser parameters must then be allocated to the individual elements of the drawing. ¾
Select the contour first (refer to Fig. 5-66).
TruMark Serie
Section "Marking field"
5-58
Rating plate example
Fig. 5-66
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
Open the context menu with the right mouse button and select the "Properties" entry.
Context menu
Fig. 5-67
The dialog window "Modify block properties" (refer to Fig. 568) appears.
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
Rating plate example
5-59
The selected contour from the drawing appears in the left-hand window so that it can be checked. ¾
Then click the "Laser" tab. Here you will find the names of the previously defined laser parameters.
¾
Select "Cut" and confirm with "OK". You will then return to the drawing.
¾
Click outside the drawing into the empty area. The contour is then displayed in the previously defined color.
"Modify rectangle properties" dialog window
5-60
Rating plate example
Fig. 5-68
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
Allocate laser parameter "Font"
The "font" laser parameter should then be allocated to the fonts and the inside lines. For this, this must be selected. This is best achieved as follows: ¾
Hold down the key and pull a frame around the fonts and lines inside the contour while holding the left mouse button down.
All elements are selected which are touched or enclosed by the selection rectangle. After releasing the following image appears:
TruMark Serie
Section "Marking field"
¾
Repeat the same steps as for "Cut".
"Modify object properties" dialog window
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
Fig. 5-69
Rating plate example
Fig. 5-70
5-61
¾
Click once outside the drawing. Lines and fonts are then displayed in the previously defined color.
¾
Save the "Rating plate" project. The laser parameters have then been allocated and the drawing appears as follows:
TruMark Serie
Finished rating plate
Fig. 5-71
The TruTops Mark® program can then interpret the data from the drawing and execute the marking program. In Chapter 3, Section 2 "Start screen > Loading a marking program" you can learn how to load the marking program and to run the program on your marking laser.
5-62
Rating plate example
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
4.
Target example
In the "Target" project you will learn the following: •
Drawing circles
•
Reproducing
•
Modifying properties
•
Centering
•
Administrating and changing hatching styles
•
Filling out (hatching)
When finished the target should be as follows:
Target
Draw circle
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
Fig. 5-72
¾
To this purpose select the "Draw" menu, the item "Circle" and the entry "Center and radius", or
¾
Click the button with the same function.
Target example
5-63
The following dialog field appears: Note If this dialog does not appear, click the black downward arrow.
"Circle: Center, radius" dialog window
¾
Reproduce
5-64
Fig. 5-73
Take the values as they are shown here and confirm your entries by clicking the red checkmark.
The target comprises 7 circles. For this reason reproduce the circle you have just drawn. ¾
In the context menu select the item "Modify" >"Copy grid-like", or
¾
Click the "Reproduce" button. The dialog window "Reproduce (matrix)" is opened.
Target example
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
Dialog window "Reproduce (matrix)"
¾
Accept the values as shown here and confirm with "OK".
¾
Select the second circle, open the context menu with the right mouse button and select "Properties". In the dialog box that follows, you can see the properties of the selected circle.
"Modify circle properties" dialog window
¾
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
Fig. 5-74
Fig. 5-75
Change the value for X: to 60 and the radius to 10. Confirm the entries with "OK".
Target example
5-65
¾
Repeat this for the remaining three circles. Increase the value for the radius by 5 mm in each case.
Note You can also multiply the circles by generating equidistants. Select the menu "Characters" > "Tools" > "Equidistants", set the distance in the tool bar "Action" to 5 mm, select the circle using the mouse.An equidistant circular line with a distance of 5 mm appears The drawing then looks like shown in Fig. 5-76.
Current processing status
5-66
Target example
Fig. 5-76
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
4.1
Define hatching style
Before you can start filling out the areas, define the hatching first. ¾
Select the "Hatch styles" menu item from the "Laser" menu. The "Administrate hatching" dialog appears. Here new hatching styles can also be defined.
"Administrate hatching" dialog window
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
Target example
Fig. 5-77
5-67
Defining hatching
Define the following four hatchings: Intensive
45 degrees
Equidistant
Linie spacing
0.050 mm
2.00 mm
1.00 mm
2.00 mm
Margin distance
0.010 mm
0.00 mm
1.00 mm
0.00 mm
Shading angle
0.00°
45.00°
Angle increment Number of hatchings
Cross
0.00 mm 45°
1
1
4 Tab. 5-3
For the hatching "Equidistant", set the radio button to equidistants. Fill out areas
First fill out the inside circle (radius 5 mm). ¾
Select the inner circle. Using the right mouse button, open the context menu and select "Fill".
¾
In the following dialog window, select hatch style "Intensive" and confirm with "OK".
"Fill" dialog window
5-68
Target example
Fig. 5-78
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
Current processing status
Fig. 5-79
To fill the next circle, select the second and third circles. ¾
To this purpose hold down the key and then click the second and third circles one after the other.
Repeat these steps for circles 4, 5 and 6, 7. The target is created as shown in Fig. 5-72.
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
Target example
5-69
5.
CE mark example
In this example you will create the following CE mark step by step.
Layout CE mark
Fig. 5-80
You will learn the following new commands: •
Cutting
•
Enlarging a section
•
Jump mode
•
Orthogonal mode
First draw the circles. The inner circle has a radius of 14 mm, the outer circle a radius of 21 mm. ¾
Click the "Circle" button and move the mouse pointer into the drawing area. The mouse pointer changes to a pencil surrounded by a circle.
¾
Move to X30 / Y60 and click on the right mouse button. The circle is deposited. Note In case the option "Repeat last drawing operation " is activated in the menu "Extras" > "Options" at the "Draw" tab, a new circle appears which you can place at the required position by clicking on the right mouse button. Exit this mode by pressing .
¾
5-70
Draw a new circle next to this circle on the right.
CE mark example
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
The drawing then looks like the image below.
Current processing status
¾
Now select the left circle and open the context menu. Select "Properties" here. The dialog window "Modify circle properties" appears.
"Modify circle properties" dialog window
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
Fig. 5-81
CE mark example
Fig. 5-82
5-71
The current dimensions of the selected circle are: • X = 30, Y = 60, radius = 14. For the second circle, the following dimensions apply: • X = 30, Y = 60, radius = 21. The following appears:
Current processing status
¾
Select both circles by dragging a rectangle over them. The circles are selected.
¾
Click on the button "Multiply".
¾
Take these values as shown in the "Reproduce" dialog.
"Reproduce (matrix)" dialog window
¾
5-72
Fig. 5-83
Fig. 5-84
Confirm the entries with "OK".
CE mark example
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
Create two vertical subsidiary lines going through the center of the circles.
¾
Click on the button "Line".
¾
Open the "Line two points" dialog and enter the start and end points which are to lead through the center of the circle.
Coordinates for the left circle Fig. 5-85
Coordinates for the right circle
Fig. 5-86
Current processing status
Fig. 5-87
Delete the lines and circle segments that are not needed.
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
CE mark example
5-73
5.1
"Trim (cut)" tool
¾
Click on the button "Tools". The tool bar is then shown.
¾
Click on the button "Cut off" and move the mouse pointer on to one line (refer to Fig. 5-88) which you no longer need.
¾
Click on all lines and circle segments that are not needed one by one until the drawing (refer to Fig. 5-88) is created.
Current processing status
Fig. 5-88
Change the second "C" into an "E". Draw a vertical line first for the front end of the middle bar "E" ¾
Open the dialog window "Line: two points" and enter the start and end points.
¾
Click on the red hook to confirm the entry.
"Line two points" dialog window
5-74
CE mark example
Fig. 5-89
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
Enlarge the section in the middle of the E character. ¾
Click the "Section" button and move the mouse pointer into the drawing area. A cross appears.
¾
Drag a rectangle around the section which you want to enlarge using the cross-hair pointer. The section is shown enlarged (refer to Fig. 5-90).
Detail of E
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
Fig. 5-90
¾
Click on the button "Orthogonal mode" and "Catch mode". – It is only possible to move in a vertical and horizontal direction in orthogonal mode. – The mouse pointer turns into a dart in jump mode. As soon as the dart appears the position is absolutely correct.
¾
Click the "Line" button and move with the pencil to the top end of the vertical line until the pencil turns into a dart. Click with the left mouse button and move to the left with the mouse. Move over the line so that an intersection point appears.
¾
In the same way, drag a second horizontal line from the lower end of the vertical line to the circular arc.
CE mark example
5-75
Current processing status
Fig. 5-91
The unnecessary lines are deleted (refer to Section 5.1 Trimming).
Fill the CE mark
¾
Click the "Whole page" button. The CE mark is created. Now, fill out the contour of the CE mark.
¾
Pull a rectangle around the entire drawing. Both characters are selected.
¾
Center the drawing in the drawing field.
¾
Select the "Fill" item in the context menu. Proceed as described in Section 3. The CE mark is then complete.
Current processing status
5-76
CE mark example
Fig. 5-92
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
6.
Example bitmap
In this example, you will learn to import a bitmap to find the appropriate laser parameters for the marking.
Bitmap
Fig. 5-93
You will get to know the following functions: • Preparing bitmap files •
Importing bitmap
•
Configuration of the laser parameters for bitmap
Firstly consider the material you are going to mark. If a light marking is to be made on a dark workpiece, you must firstly invert the bitmap. For many graphic programs, this function means to create a negative.
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
Example bitmap
5-77
Bitmap original and inverted
6.1
Fig. 5-94
Importing bitmap
Note The CAD enables you to import graphic files in the following formats: BMP (Windows bitmap format), TIFF (Tagged Image File format), JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group format) and PCX (Zsoft bitmap format). In the example, a bitmap is used. ¾ To import a bitmap, click on the "Bitmap" icon next to it. The "Open" dialog window will open.
Dialog window "Open"
¾
5-78
Fig. 5-95
Select the file which you want to import from the dialog window "Open".
Example bitmap
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
Import properties
¾ ¾
Select the size and, if desired, the angle for the bitmap. A black border with which you can position the bitmap on to the marking field appears.
Current processing status
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
Fig. 5-96
Example bitmap
Fig. 5-97
5-79
¾
Select the resolution with which the bitmap is to be imported.
Resolution
Fig. 5-98
Note The imported file is always scaled to gray.
5-80
Example bitmap
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
6.2
Setting laser parameter
When marking with a bitmap, every pixel of the graphics is marked by one or more laser impulses. Due to the resolution, the speed is determined by the frequency. The higher the frequency, the shorter the marking time is. In principle, each gray-scaled pixel is marked and each pixel corresponds at least to one laser impulse. Should a laser impulse per pixel not suffice, the parameter "Number of pulses per dot" is raised to two or more in the laser parameter configuration Note By increasing the pulses defined per dot, you increase the length of time the marking procedure takes. The optimal marking contrast is achieved by adjusting the pulse frequency, laser power and defocusing.
Administrating laser parameters
Fig. 5-99
Note Observe that the first pulse does not lead to a visible marking result for certain materials. In this case, set the parameter "Number of pulse per dot" to 2 or higher.
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
Example bitmap
5-81
7.
Import external file formats
In TruTops Mark®, the following CAD and bitmap formats can be read in: HPGL, IGES, DXF, DWG and PCR.
7.1
Import PCR files
If you have previously created your programs with WinMark, these can be imported into TruTops Mark® without loss of information. Open a new project in the "File" menu (menu item "New"). Then open the "Edit" menu and select "Import PCR file". The "Open" dialog appears. Here you select the imported file and confirm the selection with "OK".
"Edit" menu
5-82
Import external file formats
Fig. 5-100
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
"Open" dialog window
Fig. 5-101
The PCR file with the laser parameters is imported. Save the project as a VLF file.
"Save As" dialog window
7.2
Fig. 5-102
Import CAD files
If you have a file created in an external CAD program which you wish to import, you can proceed as described in Section 7.1 Import PCR files. The CAD can import CAD files with the formats HPGL, IGES, DXF and DWG. Note Ensure that you assign laser parameters to the imported CAD files.
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
Import external file formats
5-83
8.
Determining laser parameters
There are different methods to determine laser parameters. Each material responds differently to laser marking. For plastic, the parameters should be selected with care. To give you assistance, there are TruTops Mark® test programs included in the directory "C:\TRUMARK\VLF\VMC Testfiles". In Sections 8.1 and 8.2 you will learn how to use the test programs and to interpret the results.
8.1
Structure of the test programs
Determining laser parameters for plastic
1
2
3
4
5
1 Laser Typ
4 Line spacing
2 Wave length
5 Marking speed (velocity)
3 Frequency Test program (example)
Fig. 5-103
All test programs for plastic are structured as shown in Fig. 5-103. The individual fields are assigned different parameters.
5-84
Determining laser parameters
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
Loading a test programm In the directory "C:\TRUMARK\VLF\VMC Testfiles\plastic", you can find all the test programs for plastic. Example: vmc5_f100_plastic.vlf Note The marking programs have the following naming conventions: Value
Description
vmc?
Stands for the laser type. (VMc1, VMc2, VMc3, VMc4, etc.)
f???
Describes the optical system and, in this way, also determines the size of the marking field. (f100, f160, f163, f254, etc)
plastic
Stands for the marking of plastic workpieces.
*.vlf
vlf is the file type of the marking program. Tab. 5-4
Certain test programs have the upgrade "lowfreq". With these test programs, you can create markings with frequencies of 2 to 32 kHz.
Loading a test program
Fig. 5-104
•
Select the appropriate program for your laser and your installed optical system.
•
Ensure that the working distance is correct.
•
Mark the workpiece.
The appropriate parameters can be read off the workpiece and the marking can be optimized by varying the individual parameters.
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
Determining laser parameters
5-85
8.2
Determining laser parameters for annealing metals
This section describes how you find the annealing parameters for your metal workpiece. In the annealing process, the top layer of the metal is heated to such an extent as to produce a black scratchresistant marking. Structure of the test programs
1
3
2
4
1 PW Pulse width
3 v Speed
2 Defocusing
4 Frequency
Test program annealing
Fig. 5-105
All test programs for metals are structured as shown in Fig. 5-105. The individual fields have different parameters.
5-86
Determining laser parameters
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
Loading a test program In the directory "C:\TRUMARK\VLF\VMC Testfiles\metal", you can find all test programs for annealed markings using the laser marking systems. Example: vmc1_annealing_f163.vlf Note The marking programs have the following naming conventions: Value
Description
vmc?
Stands for the laser type. (VMc1, VMc3, VMc5)
anealling
"Annealing" stands for annealing program.
f???
Describes the lens and thus also determines the size of the marking field. (f100, f160, f163, f254, etc)
*.vlf
vlf is the file type of the marking program. Tab. 5-5
The appropriate parameters can be read off the workpiece and the marking can be optimized by varying the individual parameters.
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
Determining laser parameters
5-87
8.3
Determining laser parameters for engraving metals
This section describes how you find the engraving parameters for your metal workpiece. When engraving, several layers on the metal are cut away one after the other. This produces an easily read engraving. Structure of the test programs
1
2
3
4
5
6
1 Wave length (nm)
4 Number of parallel lines
2 Laser power (%)
5 Frequency in (kHz)
3 Pulse width (µs)
6 Spedd (mm/s) Fig. 5-106
All test programs for engraving of metals are structured as shown in Fig. 5-106.
5-88
Determining laser parameters
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
the directory "C:\TRUMARK\VLF\VMC Testfiles\ Loading a test program In metal_engraving", you will find all test programs for engraved markings using the laser marking systems. Example: 1064_4parallel_lines_f10-35_pw5_f163.vlf Note The marking programs have the following naming conventions: Value
Description
1064
Wave length of the laser marking system
4paralell_lines
4 parallel lines (width)
F10-35
Frequency in kHz
pw5
Pulse width in µs
f???
Describes the lens and thus also determines the size of the marking field. (f100, f160, f163, f254, etc)
*.vlf
vlf is the file type of the marking program. Tab. 5-6
The appropriate parameters can be read off the workpiece and the marking can be optimized by varying the individual parameters.
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
Determining laser parameters
5-89
5-90
Determining laser parameters
SW-EN-TTM-05-00 02/2010
Chapter 6
Sequential programs
SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010
1. 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9
Automatic marking ........................................................ 6-3 Start sequential program ................................................. 6-4 Loading a sequential program ......................................... 6-6 Change sequential program ............................................ 6-7 Create a new sequential program ................................... 6-8 Accept values .................................................................. 6-9 Save sequential program............................................... 6-10 Exit editor ....................................................................... 6-12 Context menu ................................................................ 6-13 Setup.............................................................................. 6-14
2. 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4
Commands in the editor menu................................... 6-17 General commands ....................................................... 6-18 > Axis commands .......................................................... 6-20 > Axis commands inching operation......................... 6-22 > Mark commands ......................................................... 6-23 > System commands ..................................................... 6-26
3.
Examples for sequential programs............................ 6-31
Automatic marking
6-1
6-2
Automatic marking
SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010
1.
Automatic marking
This section contains information on: •
How to create a sequential program
•
Which commands are available to this purpose
•
How simple sequential programs can be structured
A sequential program serves to control automatic, reproducible marking of workpieces. Several marking programs, different axis positions and marking and operating commands can be combined in the sequential programs. A sequential program can have as many lines as required. When you start processing, the sequential program is worked through line by line.
SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010
Automatic marking
6-3
1.1
Start sequential program
The sequential program editor is a tool enabling the easy generation of sequential programs. Sequential programs are required to automate sequences. •
Click the "F7 Sequential program" button or press the function key. The following window then opens:
Sequential programs
Fig. 6-1
The boxes in the display window of the sequential program show the status of the following parameters: Display boxes: In the "Finished parts" box, the actual counter is shown. The actual counter can be changed using the "IncCounter" command or the commands in the context menu (click on right mouse button). The "Status" box shows the status of the sequential program. The sequential program last used is shown in the "File" box. The length of an entire cycle is shown in the "Process time" box. The line in which the sequential program is located while it is being carried out is shown in the "Line number" box.
6-4
Automatic marking
SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010
The large, top right box shows the code of the loaded sequential program. Edit boxes: The box "Still to be marked" shows the value of the set counter. This is changed using the commands "SetCounter" and "InCounter" or by editing. The file names of the sequential program to be started next can be entered in the "Preselection" box.
SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010
Automatic marking
6-5
1.2
Loading a sequential program
The sequential programs last used are shown in gray. If you would like to load another program, then click on the button "F5 Open file" or press the function key .
Loading a sequential program
Fig. 6-2
Select the required program by double clicking. The program appears in the display box.
Note Sequential programs are saved with the filename extension *.wst.
6-6
Automatic marking
SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010
1.3
Change sequential program
The sequential program editor is a support tool for creating/editing sequential programs. •
Click the "F6 Open editor" button or press the function key. The program window is then enlarged and has a white background.
Editing window
Fig. 6-3
When you have carried out the changes, click on the button "F6 Exit editor" or press the function key . If you have not yet saved the changes, the following message appears:
Message: "Save changes?"
SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010
Automatic marking
Fig. 6-4
6-7
1.4 •
Note
Create a new sequential program
In the context menu click the item "New". An empty editing field then appears. Now the commands of the new sequential program must be entered. The commands can also be taken from the context menu (Refer to Chapter 2).
Commands are written into the first empty line, irrespective of the position of the cursor. The following editing functions are possible which are also familiar from other programs.
6-8
•
:
Jump to the beginning of the line
•
:
Jump to the end of the line
•
: Delete marked text
•
+ : Copy the marked text to the clipboard
•
+ : Cut marked text
•
+ : Paste text from clipboard
Automatic marking
SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010
1.5 > 8 Accept values
•
Accept values
In the context menu click the item "8 Accept values".
Fig. 6-5
The actual values given in the axis position section are taken by the sequential program. The currently loaded marking program is also taken into the sequential program.
Accept values into the sequential program
SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010
Automatic marking
Fig. 6-6
6-9
1.6 > 4 Save as
Save sequential program
If you wish to the save a sequential program under a new name and path: •
In the context menu click the item "4 Save as".
Fig. 6-7
The dialog field "4 Save as" appears on the screen.
"Save as" dialog window
6-10
•
Enter the file name and the path.
•
Click "3 Save".
Automatic marking
Fig. 6-8
SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010
> 3 Save
If you wish to save a sequential program under the same name and path: •
In the context menu, click on the menu item "3 Save".
Fig. 6-9
The sequential program is saved in the same path. The old content of the sequential program is overwritten. Tip TRUMPF recommends that you save your sequential programs *.wst and marking files *.vlf regularly on two data carriers that are independent of one another.
SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010
Automatic marking
6-11
1.7 > 12 Exit editor
Exit editor
The editor mode must be closed when a sequential program has been edited and saved. • In the context menu click the item "12 Exit editor". or • Press the function key or •
Click on the button "F6 Exit" –
Message
The editor mode is then closed.
If the sequential program has not yet been saved, a message appears on the screen.
Message: "Save changes?"
Fig. 6-10
If you want to save the sequential program: • Click the "Yes" button. If you want to close the program without saving: •
Click the "No" button.
Note If a sequential program is started and the editor mode is not yet finished, the same message appears on the screen.
6-12
Automatic marking
SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010
1.8
Context menu
The context menu in the sequential program mode makes it easy to call up many functions.
Context menu
Fig. 6-11
> 3 Reference
When referencing, the corresponding axis moves to the reference point. At the same time, ensure that the reference point for the Z axis is not the zero point but the largest possible distance to the working area. Referencing can be done for each axis individually or for all active axes together.
> 5 Part Counter on/off
The part counter "Still to be marked:" is switched on or off. Using the counter, you can preset the parts to be produced. When you set this counter to zero, the processing of the sequential program stops. You can restart the program only when the counter is set to a value that is not zero.
> 6 Set actual value counter to zero
You can set the actual counter of the parts to zero. The counter is always increased by the number that has been defined with the command "IncCounter".
> 7 Set actuel value counter
You can set the actual counter to a specific value. This allows you to interrupt the production. Before continuing production, set the counter to the appropriate value so that you maintain the number of produced parts.
SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010
Automatic marking
6-13
> 11 Change workpiece file
Load the new sequential program into the display window by means of the selection box.
> 12 History
You can load the five last loaded sequential programs back into the editor window.
> 13 Open editor
The display window for the sequential program is switched over into the editing mode. The window is enlarged and has a white background.
> 14 Setup
The set up menu for the workstation is shown.
1.9
Setup
Setup
Fig. 6-12
The menu items listed below are only shown when they can be used in the sequence or marking modes.
6-14
Automatic marking
SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010
Select "Preselection workpiece program activated"
Select "Logging activated"
Select "Shutter open" Select "Laser on"
In the sequence mode, an input box is shown. In this box, you can enter the name of the next sequence program. This file is the next file to be loaded and carried out in the sequence program. The "Path" function shows where the sequential program is loaded from. When "Logging activated" is selected, the command "Protocol" is activated in the sequence program. Using this command, every variable of a VLF file can be logged in a text file. The time, date, processing time and the name of the sequential program can be added to each line of the log. In "File", the name and path of the log file are given. The shutter is opened when the workstation is started up. The laser is switched on when the workstation is started up.
Select "Reference axis"
The axes are automatically referenced when the workstation is started up.
Select "Use start button"
The start button of the workstation is activated or deactivated.
Select "Use stop button"
The stop button of the workstation is activated or deactivated.
Select "Mark without axis positioning" Select "Starting automatically after closing door"
In the marking mode, the laser automatically moves to the entered positions when marking is started. With this option, this behavior can be switched off. The workstation starts automatically when the door is closed.
Select "Approaching loading position after end of marking"
After marking has been completed, the laser moves forwards on the Y axis to the door.
Select "Take the axis position by X/Y or Z segmentation"
If you select a segmented file, segmentation starts at the current position of the workstation.
SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010
Automatic marking
6-15
Select "Rotating the A axis to 0 degrees"
If two axes of rotation are used on a rotary table, then the inner axis is rotated back to 0 degrees after marking.
Select "A axis on/ A axis off"
Switching the A axis on and off. The axis is removed from the menu and cannot be used.
Select "Positioning the A, C, X, Y and Z axes"
When quitting the workstation, the positions of the active axes are saved. If the machine is restarted and the menu item "Reference the axes" is selected, the laser automatically moves to the axis positions last saved.
Option Door positions
Button Ok Button Cancel
6-16
With this option, the door position can be changed when opening the door. In door position 1, the door is open to its maximum. The inputs are applied. The inputs are not applied.
Automatic marking
SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010
2.
Commands in the editor menu
In the edit mode a sequential program can be generated or an existing one can be edited. Per line only one command with the corresponding parameter is allowed. The command is written in bold letters. If the first word in a line is not written in bold the command cannot be interpreted. Add comments
You can add comments into the sequential program. Thereto a semicolon must stand at the beginning of each comment line. These lines are shown in green color and only serve for information purposes.
Add parameters
A question mark ahead of the command requires the user to enter the parameters of the corresponding command. The sequential program will only continue after entering of the parameters. The "IF-THEN" instructions, the "Message" command and all commands entered without parameters are excluded from this function. Note An example with the ? function is described in Chapter 3 "Examples for sequential programs". Each command can be either entered via the keyboard or the corresponding context menu.
SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010
Commands in the editor menu
6-17
2.1
General commands
General commands
Context menu
> 1 New
Closes the sequential program currently loaded and makes an empty editing box available for the new sequential program. When modifications are being carried out on the loaded program, a query prompt appears for saving the file.
> 2 Open
Dialog box displays for opening a sequential program.
> 3 Save
Saves the file under the same name.
> 4 Save as
6-18
Fig. 6-13
Saves the file under a new name.
> 5 Cut
The marked part in the editing window is cut out and placed in the buffer storage. The Windows shortcut key for cutting can be used.
> 6 Insert
The contents of the buffer storage is pasted in at the cursor position onwards; or when a part in the editor is marked, it will be replaced. The Windows shortcut key for pasting can be used.
> 7 Copy
The marked part in the editor is copied into the buffer storage. The Windows shortcut key for copying can be used.
Commands in the editor menu
SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010
> 8 Accept values
Using this command, the current actual positions of the active axes and the loaded marking file are added into the sequential program.
> 12 Exit editor
The editor will close and the sequential program will be switched to the display mode. In case the sequential program was not saved, a message will appear on the screen.
SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010
Commands in the editor menu
6-19
2.2
> Axis commands
> 9 Axis commands
Context menu axis commands
Fig. 6-14
Here you can depose the commands "Drive absolute", "Drive relative", "Focus position" or "Referencing", of the active axes. Only the axes which are also installed are displayed. The commands listed below for the axes only function if the axes are also available.
AA: x
The axis of rotation (A axis) moves to position x.
DA: x
The outer axis of rotation (D axis) moves to position x.
CA: x
The rotary table (C axis) rotates to position x. In doing this, only A or B can stand for x.
XA: x
The X axis moves to position x.
YA: x
The Y axis moves to position x. This axis is not active with Piller control.
ZA: x
he Z axis moves to position x.
DriveTwoAxisA: w, x, y, z
6-20
Moves to the position defined under x and y with two axes simultaneously. Parameter w stands for the designation of the C or X axis, whereas parameter x stands for the position of the axis defined under w. Parameter y stands for the designation of the A, Y or Z axis, whereas parameter z stands for the position of the axis defined under y.
Commands in the editor menu
SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010
AR: x
The value x determines how far the axis of rotation (A axis) moves.
DR: x
On the rotary table, the value x determines how far the outer axis of rotation (D axis) moves.
CR: x
The value x determines how far the rotary table (C axis) moves. This command cannot be used with Piller control.
XR: x
The value x determines how far the X axis moves.
YR: x
The value x determines how far the Y axis moves. This command cannot be used with Piller control.
ZR: x
The value x determines how far the Z axis moves.
DriveTwoAxisR: w, x, y, z
Ref: x RefTwoAxis: x, y
Moves with two axes simultaneously as determined by the value specified under x and y. Parameter w stands for the designation of the C or X axis, whereas parameter x stands for the position of the axis defined under w. Parameter y stands for the designation of the A, Y or Z axis, whereas parameter z stands for the position of the axis defined under y. A reference run is carried out using the X axis. References two axes simultaneously. The parameter stands for the designation of the C or X axis, whereas parameter y stands for the designation of the A, Y or Z axis. To operate the focus position there are two specifications: • Focus finder with light barrier system • Focus finder with LAP system The focus position is set according to specification. With the light barrier system, DriveFocus is used directly.
DriveFocus: x
Travels at high speed to the position specified under x. Then at low speed to the focus position (focus finder). Note The "DriveFocus: x" command is not supported by every system. Contact the TRUMPF branch in your country if you have any questions.
ReadFocusPos
SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010
When the LAP system is used, select "3 Focus position > Read" and save. Then change to DriveFocus to find the focus position.
Commands in the editor menu
6-21
> Axis commands inching operation
Fig. 6-15
Here the commands "Start driving" and " Stop driving" can be used to move an activated axis in the inching operation (in (+) or (-) direction).
6-22
Commands in the editor menu
SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010
2.3
> Mark commands
> 10 Mark commands
Context menu mark commands
> 1 ActivedRTCList: x
> 2 Convert: x
Fig. 6-16
Activates the corresponding marking list in the retrigger mode. Parameter x can take the values 1 and 2. Marking can only be activated by means of the restart input on the digital interface. This command converts a loaded file (also refer to Preload).
> 3 DeleteVct: x
This command deletes all VCT files or the currently loaded VCT files. Parameter x can take the value "Actual" or "All".
> 4 Mark: x
If a marking file with complete path and name is inserted after the command, this file will be loaded and executed. If the command is inserted without marking file, the actually loaded file will be executed.
SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010
Commands in the editor menu
6-23
> 5 Pilot: x, y
This order switches the pilot laser on or off. The parameter x can accept the values "Contour," "Rectangle," and "Off." In "Contour" mode the pilot laser travels along the "outline" of the marking. In "Rectangle" mode the pilot laser moves around the marking with a rectangle contour. The pilot laser is switched off with the "Off" parameter. The parameter y can accept the values "Once" or "Endless". "Once" allows the pilot laser to travel once along the rectangle or contour. "Endless", on the other hand, has the pilot laser mark endlessly until the next command is executed.
> 6 Preload: x
After this command stays the marking file with name and path. This file will be loaded into the memory and converted if necessary. This command is not self-locking, e.g. the program immediately runs to next line and continues to work-off the program. So simultaneously to a conversion you can move the axis.
> 6 Preload: x, y
Should the laser be operated in the retrigger mode, the required list number y, in addition to the marking file x, must also be given to the preload command. Note A list (1 or 2) with the ActivadetRTCL command must be activated after loading the marking file. You can find out how to activate retrigger mode in Chapter 2, Section 8.3 "Tools menu" > "Setup" > "Digital interface".
> 7 Segment: x
Before you can work with this command, the segment must be loaded in a file. Then you can select any segment from this file. "x" stands for the segment number.
> 8 ShiftA: w, x, y, z
With this command a marking file can be scaled, rotated and moved. The parameter "w" stands for scaling factor, "x" for rotation angle, "y" for X-offset and "z" for Y-offset. This command affects the loaded marking file absolutely.
> 9 ShiftR: w, x, y, z
With this command a marking file can be scaled, rotated and moved. The parameter "w" stands for scaling factor, "x" for rotation angle, "y" for X-offset and "z" for Y-offset. This command affects the loaded marking file relatively.
> 10 Var: x, y, z
Inserts the variable "x" into the actually loaded marking file. This marking file must contain the variable "x", thereby the value "y" will be allocated to the variable "x". This command can be used with two or three parameters. If three parameters are used, the variable value will be read out from a file. Thereby for "y" a text-file with path and name and for the value "z" the line with the variable content are indicated. The marking program (CAD file) must contain the respective variable with the "external source" data origin.
6-24
Commands in the editor menu
SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010
Each variable is written on a separate line of the text file. The name and the value of the variables are on the same line. The two values are only separated by a comma. Note If the Var command is called up by means of a ? function, the user can use 2 or 3 parameters. All three parameters are available in the dialog window, but only x and y have to be set.
SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010
Commands in the editor menu
6-25
2.4
> System commands
> 11 System commands
Context menu system commands
System commands > 4 CopyData: old, new
6-26
Fig. 6-17
Group file access Copies the file from "old" into the file "new". The indication of the file names must contain the complete path. If the file with the name "new" already exists, it will be overwritten without warning!
Commands in the editor menu
SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010
> 6 Delete: x
The file "x" will be deleted. The complete path and name must be indicated.
> 21 NewName: old, new
The file with the name "old" is renamed as the file "new". When entering the file name, the complete path must be included. If a file exists with the name "new", it will be overwritten without warning! Example: CopyData:C:\TruMark\Wst\Test.TXT,C:\TruMark\Wst\UFO.TXT NewName:C:\TruMark\Wst\UFO.TXT,C:\TruMark\Wst\OLD.TXT Delete:C:\TruMark\Wst\OLD.TXT
Note No spaces are allowed between the parameters! > 7 EditFileStr: File1, Line, Reads the respective line out of "File1" and displays it in an input File2, Line box. The text of the input box is saved to the respective line ("Line2") of "File2" if this input box is confirmed with OK. System commands
Protocol / Loop / Counter / Message / Wait / Label
> 25 Protocol: v1, v2
With this command each variable of the marking program can be recorded in a text-file. The variables to be recorded are listed after the command and separated by a comma. This command is only available after checking off the check-box in the menu "Configuration/Workstation".
> 19 Loop: x, y
Loop start with "x" repetitions, whereby for "x" also the tilde (~) for endless may be used. The loop will be terminated after "x" loops. If endless is selected the processing has to be stopped manually. This command can also be used with two parameters. In this case the number of loops will read from a file. Thereby for "x" the complete path and file name must be indicated and for "y" the line with the number of loops. Each line only contains the number of loops. Loops may not be interlaced and must be closed with the EndLoop command.
> 8 EndLoop
Indicates the loop end. All instructions between Loop: and EndLoop will be repeated so many times until the loop counter reads zero. Then the loop will be quitted and the program continues with the next command after EndLoop.
> 14 IncCounter: x
The actual number counter will be increased by the value "x". The set value counter will be reduced accordingly. If no figure is given automatically the value "one" is being set. In the case of more than one marking, a value greater than "one" can be useful. The actual counter can be changed by the operator also by using commands from the context menu (by clicking on the right mouse button).
SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010
Commands in the editor menu
6-27
> 28 SetCounter: x > 27 Request: x > 29 SetFinishedParts:
Sets the set counter to the value "x". Confirm or cancel a request. Determines the value "x" for the parts to be processed.
> 20 Message: Text
Text outputs are shown in a message box. The message window must first be closed before the program can continue to run. After the character string "\n\r" in a text string the following text will be written in a new line.
> 31 Wait: x
The system waits the number "x" milliseconds, until the sequential program will be continued.
> 32 $Label$
Label = jump labels are marked with the symbol $ at the beginning and end of the word.
;
Anything entered following a semicolon is interpreted as comments.
System commands
> 9 If Counter=x Then
> 10 If FileExists=x Then > 11 If FileNotExists=x Then
If ( condition ) Then ( action )
This condition is true when the parts counter reaches the number x. This condition is true if the specified file x does exist. This condition is true if the specified file x does not exist.
> 12 If InputHigh:x Then
This condition becomes true when, for example, the corresponding input has the status "high = 24 V".
> 13 If InputLow:x Then
This condition becomes true when, for example, the corresponding input has the status "low = 0 V". Note If the condition is true, then the task that comes after the Then is carried out. For If (condition) Then (action) commands, the following three actions are possible:
> 1 Break
> 2 Stop > 3 $Label$
6-28
The loop will be quitted and the program continues with the next command after the loop. The program stops the execution of the script. Label = jump labels are marked with the symbol $ at the beginning and end of the word. The label must be after the IF-THEN instruction.
Commands in the editor menu
SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010
System commands
Laser / Electronics / Mechanics
> 17 LaserOff
Switching off the laser.
> 18 LaserOn
Switching on the laser.
> 1 Button
Is waiting until the start button is being pressed. The start button is only active when the pilot light shines.
> 15 InputHigh: x
Wait until the input "x" of the slot "X20" on the interface circuit board has been set. Observe the specifications in the interface description.
> 16 InputLow: x
Wait until the input "x" of the slot "X20" on the interface circuit board has been reset. Observe the specifications in the interface description.
> 23 OutputOff: x
Output "x" of laser marking system slot "X20" will be switched off. Observe manual!
> 24 OutputOn: x
Output "x" of laser marking system slot "X20" will be switched on. Observe manual! Note If the output had not been reset during the sequential program it will remain active even after ending the program.
> 5 CloseDoor
> 22 OpenDoor
Closes the door of the workstation. This command only makes sense if no C axis has been defined. Opens the door of the workstation.
> 26 QuickFlow: Gip-File
With this command you can communicate from the sequential program to the program "QuickFlow". Thereby "QuickFlow" will be started with the Gip-File. The Gip-File will be processed and afterwards closed.
> 30 TurnTable: x
Rotates the C axis from station A to station B and vice-versa. As parameter A or B must be entered. Note This command is only available if a rotary indexing table is existent.
SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010
Commands in the editor menu
6-29
System commands
CallExe/CallExeAndWait
> 2 CallExe: Exe, File
Starts the program specified under "Exe" and goes to the next line of the sequential program. A possible file, which loads the external program, is entered under "File". This command can also be used with the "Exe" attribute.
> 3 CallExeAndWait: Exe, File
Starts the program specified under "Exe" and waits until it is over. The next command of the sequential program is then executed. A possible file, which loads the external program, is entered under "File". This command can also be used with the "Exe" attribute. Example: CallExeAndWait:C:\Windows\Notepad.exe,C:\TruMark\VLF\List.txt
6-30
Commands in the editor menu
SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010
3.
Examples for sequential programs
In the directory C:\TRUMARK\WST\.... there are different examples of sequential programs. Variant TruMark Station 5000
Sequential program in the edit mode, variant TruMark Station 5000
Fig. 6-18
The following commands are used to generate this sequential program:
SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010
•
SetCounter:8000. The part counter will be set to 8000.
•
ZA:120: The Z axis move to the absolute position 120 mm.
•
XA:60: The X axis moves to the absolute position of 60 mm
•
Mark:C:\TruMark\VLFS\NR1.VLF: is marking the named file.
•
XR:50: The X axis moves on further by +50 mm.
•
Mark:C:\TruMark\VLF\SNR.VLF: the same file will be marked again but shifted by 50 mm.
Examples for sequential programs
6-31
Variant TruMark Station 5000 (R)
Sequential program in the edit mode, variant TruMark Station 5000 (R)
Fig. 6-19
For establishing this sequential program the following commands have been used: •
6-32
SetCounter:10000: The part counter will be set to 10000.
•
ZA:120: the Z axis move to the absolute position 120 mm.
•
TurnTable:A: the rotary indexing table turns to station A.
•
Mark:C:\TruMark\VLF\r_50_50_kreis2.VLF: is marking the named file.
•
ZA:125: the Z axis move to the absolute position 125 mm.
•
TurnTable:B: the rotary indexing table turns to station B.
•
Mark:C:\TruMark\VLF\ r_50_50_kreis2.VLF: is marking the named file.
Examples for sequential programs
SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010
? function variant
Sequential program in editing mode, ? function variant
Fig. 6-20
The following commands are used to create this sequential program: •
XA:65: the X axis travels to the absolute position of 65 mm.
•
ZA:109: the Z axis travels to the absolute position of 100 mm.
•
Mark:C:\TruMark\VLF\Var.VLF marks the entered file
•
?Var:Var2,C:\TRUMARK\WST\Var.txt,: The Var command is assigned the "Var2" variable. "Var2" is available as variable in the "Var.VLF" marking program. (data origin: external source). The variables are saved in the file "C:\TRUMARK\WST \Var.txt". The last entry, the line number, is missing and is requested by the ? function of the user.
Parameter input for "Var" command
Fig. 6-21
Note All parameters of the Var command specified in the sequential program also appear in the dialog window. If no parameters are entered, insert all parameters manually in the dialog window.
SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010
Examples for sequential programs
6-33
6-34
Examples for sequential programs
SW-EN-TTM-06-00 02/2010
Chapter 7
Installing TruTops Mark®
SW-EN-TTM-07-00 02/2010
1. 1.1 1.2
Introduction.................................................................... 7-3 System requirements....................................................... 7-3 Contents of the data medium .......................................... 7-3
2.
Installation...................................................................... 7-4
Introduction
7-1
7-2
Introduction
SW-EN-TTM-07-00 02/2010
1.
Introduction
This data medium is not a fully-automatic setup medium, but a medium which permits semi-automatic installation of TruTops Mark®, e.g. on a(n) • office PC • laser marking system • laser unit If you set the simulation mode on the office PC, you can create drawings for the marking by means of the CAD.
1.1 •
Operating system Windows XP Professional
•
The installation requires administrator rights
1.2 •
SW-EN-TTM-07-00 02/2010
System requirements
Contents of the data medium
TruTops Mark_x_x.exe
Introduction
=> as self-extracting file
7-3
2.
Installation
1. Place the data medium in the drive. The following dialog is opened with Autostart. If not, start the data medium from the Explorer in Windows.
Installer language
Fig. 7-1
2. Select the requested language and confirm with "OK".
Installer components
Fig. 7-2
3. Check the components you want to install and uncheck the ones you don't want to install. 4. Click "Install" to start the installation.
7-4
Installation
SW-EN-TTM-07-00 02/2010
Installer progress indicator
Fig. 7-3
The progress indicator informs you about the current progress during installation. Click "Show details" to display detailed information on the program installation.
Installer end
Fig. 7-4
5. If the installation was successful, acknowledge with "OK".
Icon TruTops Mark®
Fig. 7-5
6. The icons "TruTops Mark", "CAD" and – if selected for installation – "QuickFlow" automatically appear on the desktop. 7. The programs are started with the mouse via the respective icon.
SW-EN-TTM-07-00 02/2010
Installation
7-5
As the TruTops Mark® software is installed in simulation mode, you must switch off simulation mode after installation on a laser marking system/laser unit and activate the RTC card. ¾
Open the menu item "Tools" > "Configuration". Select the "GUI" card.
TruTops Mark® configuration
Fig. 7-6
¾
Remove the checkmark on "Simulation" in the "GUI" tab, instead activate the RTC card.
¾
Confirm the information with "OK". TruTops Mark® and the supply unit simulator are closed.
¾
Restart TruTops Mark® via the "TruTops Mark" icon. The start screen appears on the screen.
7-6
Installation
SW-EN-TTM-07-00 02/2010
Index Customer password ..................................... 2-6 Customer/operator ....................................... 2-4
A
D
Accept values .............................................. 6-9 Adjust shades of gray ................................ 2-53 Administrate hatching .............................. 4-158 Annealing..................................................... 1-8 Arc resolution........................................... 4-130 Area filling ................................................ 4-131 Assign laser parameters............................ 2-48 Automatic marking....................................... 6-3
Define marking direction ............................ 2-50 Defocusing ............................................... 4-115 Diagnostics tool.......................................... 1-12 Digital interface .......................................... 3-53 Display laser power.................................... 2-21 Display segment numbers ....................... 4-137 Dotted line................................................ 4-132 Draw......................................................... 4-220 Draw menu................................................. 4-14 DXF export............................................... 4-214
B Backround colors..................................... 4-214 Barcode ..................................................... 4-95 Barcode type ............................................. 4-96 Beam direction........................................... 1-10 Binning....................................................... 2-31 Bitmaps.................................................... 4-218 Bleaching ..................................................... 1-8
C CAD Editor................................................. 1-13 CAD, starting ............................................... 4-6 Calibrate laser power................................. 2-23 Change in color ........................................... 1-8 Circle drawing .............................................. 5-7 Color list management............................. 4-208 COM interface ........................................... 3-54 Commands in the editor menu .................. 6-17 Configuration > Digital interface ................ 3-41 Configuration > Directories........................ 3-40 Configuration > GUI................................... 3-38 Configuration > Machine ........................... 3-36 Configuration > Miscellaneous .................. 3-42 Configuration > Options............................. 3-43 Configuration > User management ........... 3-45 Configuration > User management > Card User management ...................... 2-5 Control with external data communication 3-51 Create marking program.............................. 5-6 Create polyline........................................... 4-49
SW-EN-TTM-08-00 02/2010
Index
E Editing functions........................................... 6-8 Effective velocity ...................................... 4-130 Emergency circuit ........................................ 3-7 Engraving..................................................... 1-7 Error correction ............................................ 5-9 Error display............................................... 3-31 Error info .................................................... 3-32 Error, warning history................................. 3-18 Example graphic .......................................... 5-4 Exit editor ................................................... 6-12 Export DXF/DWG....................................... 4-48 Export project data................................... 4-108 Extras menu............................................... 3-34
F First pulse ................................................ 4-118 Foaming ....................................................... 1-9 Focus test ................................................ 4-163 Font Editor ............................................... 4-165 Formats.................................................... 4-215 FPK marking ............................................ 4-118 FPS marking ............................................ 4-119 Frame correction........................................ 2-53
8-1
G
M
Gamma value ............................................ 2-49 Geometric figures ........................................ 5-5 Graphic, creating ......................................... 5-5 Grid and local coordinate system ............ 4-209 Grid setting .................................................. 5-6
Mark ......................................................... 4-219 Mark delay ............................................... 4-124 Mark preview.......................................3-7, 3-16 Marking ...........................................3-13, 4-162 Marking direction alternating...................... 2-51 Marking field............................................... 1-14 Marking field, optic ................................... 4-136 Marking file..........................................3-6, 3-13 Marking interface ..............................1-13, 3-11 Marking program........................................ 1-14 Marking program, loading ............................ 3-6 Marking program, running............................ 3-5 Marking program, starting .......................... 3-20 Material removal .......................................... 1-8 Matrix generator......................................... 2-28 Measurement type ................................... 4-204 Menu, draw ................................................ 4-57 Menu, edit .................................................. 4-45 Menu, view................................................. 4-50 Mode • CW..................................................... 4-119 • CWM.................................................. 4-121 • PULSED ............................................ 4-120 Mode 2 ....................................................... 2-52
H Hatching as area ..................................... 4-164 HPGL file import ........................................ 4-46
I Imager........................................................ 2-45 Import bitmap............................................. 2-46 Import file ................................................... 4-45 Import scale ............................................... 4-47 Input control ............................................... 4-52 Invert grayscale chart ................................ 2-50 IO status .................................................... 3-15
N J
Named sections ......................................... 4-55 Navigator.........................................2-13, 4-163
Jump ........................................................ 4-217 Jump delay .............................................. 4-123 Jump velocity........................................... 4-124
O L Lag delay ................................................... 2-51 Las Off delay ........................................... 4-123 Las On delay ........................................... 4-123 Laser marking systems................................ 2-3 Laser menu................................................ 3-25 Laser menu.............................................. 4-105 Laser parameters ...................................... 3-17 Laser power ............................................. 4-116 Laser units ................................................... 2-3 Last view.................................................... 4-54 Load CAD file .............................................. 3-6
Object matrix............................................ 4-151 Objects..................................................... 4-226 Octagon drawing........................................ 5-12 Operation matrix generator........................ 2-32 Operator password ...................................... 2-6 Optimize grayscale chart ........................... 2-49 Option at customer..................................... 2-12 Option Navigator ........................................ 1-14 Optional settings ........................................ 2-13 Options......................................................... 2-1
P Parallel lines............................................. 4-130
8-2
SW-EN-TTM-08-00 02/2010
Parameter dimensioning.......................... 4-205 Paths........................................................ 4-223 Pilot laser ........................................ 2-25, 4-162 Pilot laser setup ................................ 2-26, 3-25 Pilot laser, activating.................................. 2-27 Point......................................................... 4-222 Polygon delay .......................................... 4-123 Project data.............................................. 4-161 Protection cover........................................... 3-8 Pulse........................................................ 4-117 Pulse frequency....................................... 4-117 Pulse repetition frequency ....................... 4-117
Q
Step period............................................... 4-124 System status ............................................ 3-14
T TCP/IP interface......................................... 3-54 Templates ................................................ 4-224 Terms ......................................................... 1-14 Text object ................................................. 4-90 TLV control commands .............................. 3-32 Track width............................................... 4-116 TrueType.................................................. 4-170 TrueType font import................................ 4-171 TXF font ................................................... 4-169
QuickFlow .................................................. 3-53
U R Rectangle drawing..................................... 5-10 Remove double line................................... 4-49 Reset ................................................ 3-12, 3-27
User interface CAD ...................................... 4-7 User interface CAD with Multihead............ 4-13 User levels ................................................... 2-4
V S Safety circuit open ....................................... 3-8 Save......................................................... 4-223 Save marking program ................................ 5-9 Save sequential program........................... 6-10 Scanning speed....................................... 4-117 Segments, sorting.................................... 4-160 Selection .................................................... 4-54 Sequence...................................... 4-130, 4-134 Sequential program ................................... 1-14 Sequential program editor ........................... 6-4 Serial interface........................................... 3-53 Show segmentation ................................. 4-136 Shutter ................................................ 3-9, 3-12 Simmer .................................................... 4-120 Simulation mode.......................................... 2-3 Start screen ................................................. 3-4 Status........................................................... 3-9 Status area ................................................ 3-14 Status bar .................................................. 4-50 Status line ................................................ 4-216
SW-EN-TTM-08-00 02/2010
Variable list administration....................... 4-153
W White levels................................................ 2-53 Width .............................................4-129, 4-130 Wobbling .................................................. 4-130 Workpiece .................................................... 3-8 Workstation marking program.................... 3-52
Z Z offset ..................................................... 4-116
8-3
8-4
SW-EN-TTM-08-00 02/2010
